US20210225922A1 - Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii - Google Patents
Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20210225922A1 US20210225922A1 US17/208,478 US202117208478A US2021225922A1 US 20210225922 A1 US20210225922 A1 US 20210225922A1 US 202117208478 A US202117208478 A US 202117208478A US 2021225922 A1 US2021225922 A1 US 2021225922A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- voltage
- capacitor
- photodiode
- region
- mosfet transistor
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Si].[Ge] Chemical compound [Si].[Ge] LEVVHYCKPQWKOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 title claims description 64
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 141
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 claims description 187
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 137
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 121
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 89
- 229910052732 germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 59
- GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium atom Chemical compound [Ge] GNPVGFCGXDBREM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 58
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 331
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 155
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 110
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 100
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 99
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 97
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 72
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 50
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 44
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 44
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 38
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 37
- 108091006146 Channels Proteins 0.000 description 36
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 35
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 31
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 30
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 28
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 23
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 22
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 20
- 239000003574 free electron Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 19
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 18
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 18
- 229910052681 coesite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 16
- 229910052906 cristobalite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 16
- 229910052682 stishovite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 16
- 229910052905 tridymite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 16
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 15
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 13
- BHEPBYXIRTUNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydridophosphorus(.) (triplet) Chemical compound [PH] BHEPBYXIRTUNPN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 12
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 11
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 10
- 229910021419 crystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910000577 Silicon-germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000005229 chemical vapour deposition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000002513 implantation Methods 0.000 description 6
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229910008310 Si—Ge Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005498 polishing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920005591 polysilicon Polymers 0.000 description 4
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910000676 Si alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003989 dielectric material Substances 0.000 description 3
- -1 e.g. Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000005669 field effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000000059 patterning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 238000005381 potential energy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 3
- 235000012239 silicon dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910004541 SiN Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- MCMNRKCIXSYSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zirconium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Zr]=O MCMNRKCIXSYSNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[Al+3].[Al+3] PNEYBMLMFCGWSK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002800 charge carrier Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052593 corundum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000407 epitaxy Methods 0.000 description 2
- YBMRDBCBODYGJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N germanium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Ge]=O YBMRDBCBODYGJE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000116 mitigating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002161 passivation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910001845 yogo sapphire Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- YKMMLFOYDTYAGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-phenyl-2-(propan-2-ylamino)pentan-1-one Chemical compound CCCC(NC(C)C)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 YKMMLFOYDTYAGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000699 N-Type Calcium Channels Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004129 N-Type Calcium Channels Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010075750 P-Type Calcium Channels Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910007667 ZnOx Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008186 active pharmaceutical agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009795 derivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000023077 detection of light stimulus Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 1
- CJNBYAVZURUTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N hafnium(IV) oxide Inorganic materials O=[Hf]=O CJNBYAVZURUTKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002329 infrared spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N lanthanum oxide Inorganic materials [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[La+3].[La+3] MRELNEQAGSRDBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000004767 nitrides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KTUFCUMIWABKDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxolanthaniooxy)lanthanum Chemical compound O=[La]O[La]=O KTUFCUMIWABKDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002861 polymer material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/14—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation
- H01L27/144—Devices controlled by radiation
- H01L27/146—Imager structures
- H01L27/14643—Photodiode arrays; MOS imagers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/0248—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies
- H01L31/0352—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies characterised by their shape or by the shapes, relative sizes or disposition of the semiconductor regions
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/0248—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies
- H01L31/0352—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies characterised by their shape or by the shapes, relative sizes or disposition of the semiconductor regions
- H01L31/035272—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies characterised by their shape or by the shapes, relative sizes or disposition of the semiconductor regions characterised by at least one potential jump barrier or surface barrier
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/0248—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies
- H01L31/036—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies characterised by their crystalline structure or particular orientation of the crystalline planes
- H01L31/0376—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by their semiconductor bodies characterised by their crystalline structure or particular orientation of the crystalline planes including amorphous semiconductors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/04—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof adapted as photovoltaic [PV] conversion devices
- H01L31/06—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof adapted as photovoltaic [PV] conversion devices characterised by potential barriers
- H01L31/075—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof adapted as photovoltaic [PV] conversion devices characterised by potential barriers the potential barriers being only of the PIN type, e.g. amorphous silicon PIN solar cells
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/08—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors
- H01L31/10—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors characterised by potential barriers, e.g. phototransistors
- H01L31/101—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation
- H01L31/102—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation characterised by only one potential barrier
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/08—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors
- H01L31/10—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors characterised by potential barriers, e.g. phototransistors
- H01L31/101—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation
- H01L31/102—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation characterised by only one potential barrier
- H01L31/103—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation characterised by only one potential barrier the potential barrier being of the PN homojunction type
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L31/00—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
- H01L31/08—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors
- H01L31/10—Semiconductor devices sensitive to infrared radiation, light, electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelength or corpuscular radiation and specially adapted either for the conversion of the energy of such radiation into electrical energy or for the control of electrical energy by such radiation; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof in which radiation controls flow of current through the device, e.g. photoresistors characterised by potential barriers, e.g. phototransistors
- H01L31/101—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation
- H01L31/102—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation characterised by only one potential barrier
- H01L31/109—Devices sensitive to infrared, visible or ultraviolet radiation characterised by only one potential barrier the potential barrier being of the PN heterojunction type
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N1/00—Scanning, transmission or reproduction of documents or the like, e.g. facsimile transmission; Details thereof
- H04N1/04—Scanning arrangements, i.e. arrangements for the displacement of active reading or reproducing elements relative to the original or reproducing medium, or vice versa
- H04N1/19—Scanning arrangements, i.e. arrangements for the displacement of active reading or reproducing elements relative to the original or reproducing medium, or vice versa using multi-element arrays
- H04N1/191—Scanning arrangements, i.e. arrangements for the displacement of active reading or reproducing elements relative to the original or reproducing medium, or vice versa using multi-element arrays the array comprising a one-dimensional array, or a combination of one-dimensional arrays, or a substantially one-dimensional array, e.g. an array of staggered elements
- H04N1/192—Simultaneously or substantially simultaneously scanning picture elements on one main scanning line
- H04N1/193—Simultaneously or substantially simultaneously scanning picture elements on one main scanning line using electrically scanned linear arrays, e.g. linear CCD arrays
- H04N1/1931—Simultaneously or substantially simultaneously scanning picture elements on one main scanning line using electrically scanned linear arrays, e.g. linear CCD arrays with scanning elements electrically interconnected in groups
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N25/00—Circuitry of solid-state image sensors [SSIS]; Control thereof
- H04N25/47—Image sensors with pixel address output; Event-driven image sensors; Selection of pixels to be read out based on image data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2224/00—Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
- H01L2224/01—Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
- H01L2224/02—Bonding areas; Manufacturing methods related thereto
- H01L2224/07—Structure, shape, material or disposition of the bonding areas after the connecting process
- H01L2224/08—Structure, shape, material or disposition of the bonding areas after the connecting process of an individual bonding area
- H01L2224/081—Disposition
- H01L2224/0812—Disposition the bonding area connecting directly to another bonding area, i.e. connectorless bonding, e.g. bumpless bonding
- H01L2224/08135—Disposition the bonding area connecting directly to another bonding area, i.e. connectorless bonding, e.g. bumpless bonding the bonding area connecting between different semiconductor or solid-state bodies, i.e. chip-to-chip
- H01L2224/08145—Disposition the bonding area connecting directly to another bonding area, i.e. connectorless bonding, e.g. bumpless bonding the bonding area connecting between different semiconductor or solid-state bodies, i.e. chip-to-chip the bodies being stacked
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2224/00—Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
- H01L2224/80—Methods for connecting semiconductor or other solid state bodies using means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected
- H01L2224/80001—Methods for connecting semiconductor or other solid state bodies using means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected by connecting a bonding area directly to another bonding area, i.e. connectorless bonding, e.g. bumpless bonding
- H01L2224/808—Bonding techniques
- H01L2224/80894—Direct bonding, i.e. joining surfaces by means of intermolecular attracting interactions at their interfaces, e.g. covalent bonds, van der Waals forces
- H01L2224/80895—Direct bonding, i.e. joining surfaces by means of intermolecular attracting interactions at their interfaces, e.g. covalent bonds, van der Waals forces between electrically conductive surfaces, e.g. copper-copper direct bonding, surface activated bonding
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L2224/00—Indexing scheme for arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies and methods related thereto as covered by H01L24/00
- H01L2224/80—Methods for connecting semiconductor or other solid state bodies using means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected
- H01L2224/80001—Methods for connecting semiconductor or other solid state bodies using means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected by connecting a bonding area directly to another bonding area, i.e. connectorless bonding, e.g. bumpless bonding
- H01L2224/808—Bonding techniques
- H01L2224/80894—Direct bonding, i.e. joining surfaces by means of intermolecular attracting interactions at their interfaces, e.g. covalent bonds, van der Waals forces
- H01L2224/80896—Direct bonding, i.e. joining surfaces by means of intermolecular attracting interactions at their interfaces, e.g. covalent bonds, van der Waals forces between electrically insulating surfaces, e.g. oxide or nitride layers
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02E—REDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
- Y02E10/00—Energy generation through renewable energy sources
- Y02E10/50—Photovoltaic [PV] energy
- Y02E10/548—Amorphous silicon PV cells
Definitions
- This specification relates to detecting light using a photodiode.
- Light propagates in free space or an optical medium is coupled to a photodiode that converts an optical signal to an electrical signal for processing.
- a photodiode may be used to detect optical signals and convert the optical signals to electrical signals that may be further processed by another circuitry.
- Photodiodes may be used in consumer electronics products, image sensors, data communications, time-of-flight (TOF) applications, medical devices, and many other suitable applications.
- silicon is used as an image sensor material, but silicon has a low optical absorption efficiency for wavelengths in the near-infrared (NIR) spectrum or longer.
- Other materials and/or material alloys such as germanium and germanium-silicon may be used as image sensor materials with innovative optical device structure design described in this specification.
- a photodiode is formed using materials such as germanium or germanium-silicon to increase the speed and/or the sensitivity and/or the dynamic range and/or the operating wavelength range of the device.
- photodiodes formed using germanium or germanium-silicon and photodiodes formed using silicon may be integrated on a common substrate to yield a photodiode array having a greater operating wavelength range.
- light reflected from a three-dimensional object may be detected by photodiodes of an imaging system.
- the photodiodes convert the detected light into electrical charges.
- Each photodiode may include multiple gates that are controlled to collect the electrical charges.
- the collection of the electrical charges controlled by the multiple gates may be altered over time, such that the imaging system may determine the phase and other information of the sensed light.
- the imaging system may use the phase information to analyze characteristics associated with the three-dimensional object including depth information or a material composition.
- the imaging system may also use the phase information to analyze characteristics associated with eye-gesture recognition, body-gesture recognition, three-dimensional model scanning/video recording, and/or augmented/virtual reality applications.
- an optical apparatus that includes: a semiconductor substrate formed from a first material, the semiconductor substrate including a first n-doped region; and a photodiode supported by the semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, the absorption region being formed from a second material different than the first material and including: a first p-doped region; and a second n-doped region coupled to the first n-doped region, wherein a second doping concentration of the second n-doped region is less than or substantially equal to a first doping concentration of the first n-doped region.
- the semiconductor substrate can be formed by bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer.
- the first material can be silicon and the second material can include germanium.
- the first doping concentration of the first n-doped region can be substantially equal to 16 times the second doping concentration of the second n-doped region.
- the first and second doping concentrations can be set such that a first Fermi level of the first n-doped region and a second Fermi level of the second n-doped region are substantially equal.
- the first p-doped region can be arranged on a first surface of the absorption region, and the second n-doped region can be arranged on a second surface opposing the first surface.
- the first p-doped region and the second n-doped region can be arranged on a first surface of the absorption region.
- the semiconductor substrate can further include a recess, and at least a portion of the absorption region can be embedded in the recess.
- the recess can include a sidewall spacer.
- the first n-doped region can surround at least a portion of the recess. In some embodiments, the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region can be adjacent.
- the optical apparatus can further include a first metallic interconnect coupled to the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region.
- the optical apparatus can further include: one or more readout regions coupled to one or more readout circuits, the one or more readout regions configured to provide the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to the one or more readout circuits; and one or more gates coupled to one or more control signals that control carrier transports between the photodiode and the one or more readout regions.
- the one or more readout regions and the one or more gates can be supported by the semiconductor substrate.
- the one or more readout regions can further include one or more floating-diffusion capacitors.
- the optical apparatus can further include: a lens supported by the semiconductor substrate.
- the lens can be integrally formed on the semiconductor substrate.
- the optical apparatus can further include: a spacer layer supported by the semiconductor substrate, wherein, in a direction normal to a substrate surface, the spacer layer is arranged between the absorption region and the lens.
- the spacer layer can have a thickness corresponding to a focal length of the lens.
- the optical apparatus can further include: an anti-reflection layer supported by the semiconductor substrate and arranged between the semiconductor substrate and the lens.
- an optical apparatus that includes: a semiconductor substrate formed from a first material and including a recess; and a photodiode supported by the semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, wherein the absorption region is formed from a second material different than the first material and at least a portion of the absorption region is embedded in the recess, and wherein the absorption region includes: a first p-doped region; a first n-doped region; a second n-doped region; and a first gate coupled to a first control signal and configured to control a carrier transport between the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region, wherein a first doping concentration of the first n-doped region is less than or substantially equal to a second doping concentration of the second n-doped region.
- an optical apparatus that includes: a first semiconductor substrate formed from a first material and including a recess; a photodiode supported by the first semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, wherein the absorption region is formed from a second material different than the first material and at least a portion of the absorption region is embedded in the recess, and wherein the absorption region includes: a first p-doped region; and a first n-doped region; a second semiconductor substrate formed from a third material different than the second material, the second semiconductor substrate including: a second n-doped region; one or more readout regions coupled to one or more readout circuits, the one or more readout regions configured to provide the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to the one or more readout circuits; and one or more gates coupled to one or more control signals that
- a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first MOSFET transistor including: a first channel terminal coupled to a first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; a second channel terminal; and a gate terminal coupled to a first control voltage source; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; and
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first MOSFET transistor, the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the first MOSFET transistor are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode, the first MOSFET transistor, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region.
- the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage
- the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage
- the first control voltage source can reduce a first dark current integrated by the first capacitor and a second dark current integrated by the second capacitor relative to a comparable circuit without the first MOSFET transistor.
- the photodiode can further include a light absorption region including germanium.
- the photodiode can further include a recess, and at least a portion of the light absorption region can be embedded in the recess.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; a first MOSFET transistor including: a first channel terminal; a second channel terminal coupled to the first readout circuit; and a first gate terminal coupled to a first control voltage source; a second MOSFET transistor including: a third channel terminal; a fourth channel terminal coupled to the second readout circuit;
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first MOSFET transistor, the second MOSFET transistor, the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, the first MOSFET transistor, and the second MOSFET transistor are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode, the current-steering circuit, the first MOSFET transistor, and the second MOSFET transistor are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first MOSFET transistor and the second MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region.
- the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage
- the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage
- the first control voltage source can reduce a first dark current integrated by the first capacitor and a second dark current integrated by the second capacitor relative to a comparable circuit without the first MOSFET transistor and the second MOSFET transistor.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; and a current-steering circuit configured to steer the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to one or both of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit, the current-steering circuit including: a first current-steering MOSFET transistor including a first gate terminal coupled
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first current-steering MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region
- the second control voltage can be configured to operate the second current-steering MOSFET transistor in the subthreshold region or the saturation region.
- the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage
- the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage
- the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- Germanium is an efficient absorption material for near-infrared wavelengths, which reduces the problem of slow photo-carriers generated at a greater substrate depth when an inefficient absorption material, e.g., silicon, is used.
- An increased device bandwidth allows the use of a higher modulation frequency in an optical sensing system, giving advantages such as a greater depth resolution.
- a germanium-silicon alloy material as the optical absorption layer with innovative design provides higher optical absorption efficiency over conventional Si material, which may provide a more sensitive sensor in the visible and near-infrared spectrums, may reduce crosstalk between neighboring pixels, and may allow for a reduction of pixel sizes.
- a hybrid sensor design may support time-of-flight (TOF), near-infrared, and visible image sensing within the same sensing array.
- TOF time-of-flight
- An increased device bandwidth allows the use of a higher modulation frequency in a time-of-flight system, giving a greater depth resolution.
- the signal-to-noise ratio can be improved while maintaining substantially the same power consumption for the time-of-flight system. This is made possible when the device bandwidth is increased so that the duty cycle of the optical pulses can be decreased without distorting the pulse shape.
- FIG. 1 is an example of a photodiode array.
- FIG. 2 is an example of a photodiode array.
- FIG. 3 is an example of a photodiode array.
- FIGS. 4A and 4B are examples of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light.
- FIG. 5 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light.
- FIG. 6 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light.
- FIG. 7 is an example of a multi-gate photodiode.
- FIG. 8 is an example of a multi-gate photodiode.
- FIGS. 9A-9C are examples of a photodetector.
- FIG. 10A shows an example band diagram across a silicon substrate and a germanium mesa.
- FIGS. 10B-10D show examples of photodiodes with reduced built-in potential.
- FIGS. 11A-11F show examples of photodiodes with improved carrier transfer.
- FIGS. 11G and 11H show examples of wafer-bonded photodiodes.
- FIG. 12 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible or infrared light.
- FIG. 13 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light.
- FIG. 14 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light.
- FIG. 15 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light.
- FIG. 16 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light.
- FIGS. 17A-17D illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array.
- FIGS. 18A-18D illustrate an example of a design for forming germanium-silicon.
- FIGS. 19A-19D illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array.
- FIGS. 20A-20F illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array.
- FIGS. 21A-21B are cross-sectional views of example configurations of microlenses integrated with photodetectors.
- FIG. 22A is a block diagram of an example of an imaging system.
- FIGS. 22B and 22C show examples of techniques for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system.
- FIG. 23 shows an example of a flow diagram for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system.
- FIGS. 24A-24C show schematic diagrams of circuits for operating a multi-gate photodiode.
- Photodiodes may be used to detect optical signals and convert the optical signals to electrical signals that may be further processed by another circuitry.
- a material absorbs light at various wavelengths to generate free carriers depending on an energy bandgap associated with the material.
- silicon may have an energy bandgap of 1.12 eV
- germanium may have an energy bandgap of 0.66 eV
- a germanium-silicon alloy may have an energy bandgap between 0.66 eV and 1.12 eV depending on the composition.
- a material having a lower energy bandgap has a higher absorption coefficient at a particular wavelength. If the absorption coefficient of a material is too low, the optical signal cannot be converted to an electrical signal efficiently.
- a photodiode array that integrates silicon and germanium/germanium-silicon on a common substrate, where a photodiode array uses silicon to detect visible light and uses germanium or germanium-silicon to detect NIR light, would enable the photodiode array to have a wide detection spectrum.
- the term “photodiode” may be used interchangeably as the term “photodetector” or the term “optical sensor”.
- the term “germanium-silicon (GeSi)”, “silicon-germanium (SiGe)” may be used interchangeably, and both include all suitable SiGe composition combinations from more than 90% germanium (Ge) to more than 90% silicon (Si).
- the GeSi layer may be formed using blanket epitaxy, selective epitaxy, or other applicable technique.
- a strained super lattice structure including multiple layers such as alternating SiGe layer with different compositions may be used for the absorption or forming a quantum well structure.
- FIG. 1 is an example a photodiode array 100 where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes.
- An optical image sensor array is an example of a photodiode array.
- the photodiode array 100 includes a substrate 102 , an integrated circuit layer 104 , an interconnect layer 106 , a sensor layer 108 , a filter layer 110 , and a lens layer 112 .
- light of a single wavelength or multiple wavelengths enters the lens layer 112 , where the light may be focused, collimated, expanded, or processed according to the lens design.
- the light then enters the filter layer 110 , where the filter layer 110 may be configured to pass light having a specific wavelength range.
- the photodiodes in the sensor layer 108 converts the incident light into free carriers.
- the integrated circuit layer 104 collects the free carriers through the interconnect layer 106 and processes the free carriers according to the specific application.
- the substrate 102 may be a silicon substrate, a silicon-on-insulator (SOI) substrate, or any other suitable carrier substrate materials.
- the integrated circuits of the integrated circuit layer 104 and the interconnects of the interconnect layer 106 may be fabricated using CMOS processing techniques.
- the interconnects may be formed by dry-etching a contact hole through a dielectric layer and filling the contact hole by a copper using chemical vapor deposition (CVD).
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- the shape of the lens could be concave, convex, planar with surface structure, or other shapes, and its shape should not be limited by the exemplary drawings here.
- the sensor layer 108 includes multiple groups of photodiodes for detecting light of different wavelength ranges.
- a group of photodiodes that includes photodiodes 122 a , 122 b , and others not shown in this figure may be configured to detect light of a blue wavelength range (e.g., 460 nm ⁇ 40 nm).
- a group of photodiodes that includes photodiodes 124 a , 124 b , and others not shown in this figure may be configured to detect light of a green wavelength range (e.g., 540 nm ⁇ 40 nm).
- a group of photodiodes that includes photodiodes 126 a , 126 b , and others not shown in this figure may be configured to detect light of a red wavelength range (e.g., 620 nm ⁇ 40 nm).
- a group of photodiodes that includes photodiode 128 a and others not shown in this figure may be configured to detect light of a NIR wavelength range (e.g., 850 nm ⁇ 40 nm, 940 nm ⁇ 40 nm, or >1 ⁇ m).
- Each photodiode may be isolated by insulating sidewall spacers, trenches, or other suitable isolation structures.
- the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by an optical filter in the filter layer 110 .
- the photodiode 126 a is configured to receive a red wavelength range, where the center wavelength and the limits of the wavelength range are controlled by the characteristics of the filter above the photodiode 126 a .
- a filter may be formed by depositing layers of dielectric materials, such that light having a wavelength within a specific wavelength range would pass through the filter and light having a wavelength outside the specific wavelength range would be reflected by the filter.
- a filter may also be formed by forming a layer of a material on the photodiode, such that light having a wavelength within a specific wavelength range would pass through the filter and light having a wavelength outside the specific wavelength range would be absorbed by the filter.
- a silicon layer may be formed on a germanium-silicon photodiode, where the silicon layer absorbs visible light but is transparent to NIR light.
- the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by a material composition of the photodiode.
- a material composition of the photodiode For example, an increase in germanium composition in a germanium-silicon alloy may increase the sensitivity of the photodiode at longer wavelengths.
- the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by a combination of the optical filter and the material composition of the photodiode.
- the groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light may be silicon photodiodes, while the group of photodiodes that are configured to detect NIR light may be germanium photodiodes or germanium-silicon photodiodes.
- one or more groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light may be silicon photodiodes, while one or more other groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light (e.g., red) and the group of photodiodes that are configured to detect NIR light may be germanium photodiodes or germanium-silicon photodiodes.
- the group of photodiodes that detect red light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a lower germanium concentration than the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light.
- the germanium concentration may range from 10% to 100%.
- the group of photodiodes that detect red light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a different thickness from the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light.
- FIG. 2 is an example photodiode array 200 that shows a top view of a two-dimensional photodiode array, where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes.
- the photodiodes in the photodiode array 200 are similar to the photodiodes described in the photodiode array 100 .
- the photodiodes of the photodiode array 200 are arranged as pixels.
- silicon photodiodes are formed as pixels for detecting visible light
- germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are embedded in the silicon as pixels for detecting NIR light.
- silicon photodiodes are formed as pixels for detecting blue and green light
- germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are embedded in the silicon as pixels for detecting red and NIR light.
- FIG. 3 is an example photodiode array 300 , where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes.
- the photodiodes in the photodiode array 300 are similar to the photodiodes described in the photodiode array 100 .
- the photodiode array 300 includes a group of photodiodes 302 a , 302 b , and others not shown in this figure that are configured to detect light of a white wavelength range (e.g., 420 nm to 660 nm).
- the photodiodes 302 a and 302 b may be silicon photodiodes.
- the photodiodes 302 a and 302 b may be germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes to improve the overall light absorption of the diodes.
- the group of photodiodes that detect white light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a lower germanium concentration than the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light.
- the group of photodiodes that detect white light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a different thickness from the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light.
- FIG. 4A illustrates example photodiodes 400 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals.
- the example photodiodes 400 includes an NIR pixel 402 and a visible pixel 404 that are formed on a common substrate.
- the NIR pixel 402 and the visible pixel 404 are separated by an isolation structure 406 .
- the NIR pixel 402 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range.
- the visible pixel 404 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red).
- the NIR pixel 402 and the visible pixel 404 may be photodiodes in the sensor layer 108 as described in reference to FIG. 1 , for example.
- the visible pixel 404 includes an n-Si region 412 , a p+ Si region 413 , a p-Si region 414 , an n+ Si region 415 , a first gate 416 , a first control signal 417 coupled to the first gate 416 , and a readout circuit 418 coupled to the n+ Si region 415 .
- the n-Si region 412 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the p+ Si region 413 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the p-Si region 414 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the n+ Si region 415 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorous.
- the n-Si layer 412 receives an optical signal 408 and converts the optical signal 408 into electrical signals.
- the optical signal 408 enters the n-Si region 412 , where the n-Si region 412 absorbs the optical signal 408 and converts the absorbed light into free carriers.
- the optical signal 408 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 408 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- the first gate 416 may be coupled to the first control signal 417 .
- the first gate 416 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the first control signal 417 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the first control signal 417 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p+Si region 413 to the n+ Si region 415 . For example, if a voltage of the control signal 417 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below the p+ Si region 413 will drift to the n+ Si region 415 .
- the n+ Si region 415 may be coupled to the first readout circuit 418 .
- the first readout circuit 418 may be in a three-transistor configuration consisting of a reset gate, a source-follower, and a selection gate, or any suitable circuitry for processing free carriers.
- the first readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on a substrate that is common to the visible pixel 404 .
- the first readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on the integrated circuit layer 104 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- the first readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on another substrate and co-packaged with the visible pixel 404 via die/wafer bonding or stacking.
- the NIR pixel 402 includes an n-Si region 422 , a p+ Si region 423 , a p-Si region 424 , an n+ Si region 425 , a second gate 426 , a second control signal 427 coupled to the second gate 426 , a second readout circuit 428 coupled to the n+ Si region 425 , a p+ GeSi region 431 , and an intrinsic GeSi region 433 .
- the n-Si region 422 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the p+ Si region 423 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the p-Si region 424 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the n+ Si region 425 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorous.
- the intrinsic GeSi region 433 receives an optical signal 406 and converts the optical signal 406 into electrical signals.
- the optical signal 406 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 406 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a thickness of the intrinsic GeSi region 433 may be between 0.05 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
- the intrinsic GeSi region 433 may include a p+ GeSi region 431 .
- the p+ GeSi region 431 may repel the photo-electrons away from the intrinsic GeSi region 433 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency.
- the p+ GeSi region 431 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 when the intrinsic GeSi region 433 is germanium and doped with boron.
- the generated free carriers in the intrinsic GeSi region 433 may drift or diffuse into the n-Si region 422 .
- a difference between the Fermi level of the p+ Si region 423 and the Fermi level of the n-Si region 422 creates an electric field between the two regions, where free electrons collected from the intrinsic GeSi region 433 by the n-Si region 422 are drifted to a region below the p+ Si region 423 by the electric field.
- the second gate 426 may be coupled to the second control signal 427 .
- the second gate 426 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the second control signal 427 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the second control signal 427 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p+ Si region 423 to the n+ Si region 425 . For example, if a voltage of the second control signal 427 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below the p+ Si region 423 will drift to the n+ Si region 425 .
- the n+ Si region 425 may be coupled to the second readout circuit 428 .
- the second readout circuit 428 may be similar to the first readout circuit 418 .
- the visible pixel 404 and the NIR pixel 402 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons.
- the p+ Si regions 413 and 423 would be replaced by n+ Si regions
- the n-Si regions 412 and 413 would be replaced by p-Si regions
- the p-Si regions 414 and 424 would be replaced by n-Si regions
- the n+ Si region 415 and 425 would be replaced by p+ Si regions.
- FIG. 4B illustrates example photodiodes 450 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals.
- the photodiodes 450 includes a visible pixel 454 and an NIR pixel 452 .
- the visible pixel 454 is similar to the visible pixel 404 as described in reference to FIG. 4A .
- the NIR pixel 452 is similar to the NIR pixel 402 as described in reference to FIG. 4A .
- the surface of the visible pixel 454 and the NIR pixel 452 that receive optical signals 458 and 460 is a planarized surface, where the intrinsic GeSi region 462 and the p+ GeSi region 464 are embedded in an oxide layer 456 .
- the oxide layer 456 may be formed on the p-Si region 466 .
- a thickness of the oxide layer 456 may be selected to be the thickness of the intrinsic GeSi region 462 .
- a sensor region may be formed in the oxide layer 456 by etching or any other suitable techniques. Germanium-silicon may be selectively grown in the sensor region to form the intrinsic GeSi region 462 .
- a planarized surface between the visible pixel 454 and the NIR pixel 452 enables additional processing on the photodiode surface and/or bonding with devices fabricated on a separate substrate.
- FIG. 5 illustrates example photodiodes 500 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals.
- the example photodiodes 500 includes an NIR pixel 502 and a visible pixel 504 that are formed on a common substrate.
- the NIR pixel 502 and the visible pixel 504 are separated by an isolation structure 506 .
- the NIR pixel 502 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range.
- the visible pixel 504 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red).
- the NIR pixel 502 and the visible pixel 504 may be photodiodes in the sensor layer 108 as described in reference to FIG. 1 , for example.
- the visible pixel 504 includes an n-Si region 512 , a p+ Si region 513 , a p-Si region 514 , an n+ Si region 515 , a first gate 516 , a first control signal 517 coupled to the first gate 516 , and a readout circuit 518 coupled to the n+ Si region 515 .
- the n-Si region 512 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the p+ Si region 513 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the p-Si region 514 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the n+ Si region 515 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorous.
- the p+ Si layer 513 receives an optical signal 508 . Since the thickness of the p+ Si layer 513 is generally thin (e.g., 100 nm), the optical signal 508 propagates into the n-Si region 512 , where the n-Si region 512 absorbs the optical signal 508 and converts the optical signal 508 into free carriers.
- the optical signal 508 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 508 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- the first gate 516 may be coupled to the first control signal 517 .
- the first gate 516 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the first control signal 517 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the first control signal 517 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p+Si region 513 to the n+ Si region 515 .
- the n+ Si region 515 may be coupled to the first readout circuit 518 that processes the collected electrical signal.
- the first readout circuit 518 may be similar to the first readout circuit 418 as described in reference to FIG. 4A .
- the NIR pixel 502 includes an n-Si region 522 , a p-Si region 524 , an n+ Si region 525 , a second gate 526 , a second control signal 527 coupled to the second gate 526 , a second readout circuit 528 coupled to the n+ Si region 525 , a p+ GeSi region 531 , and an intrinsic GeSi region 533 .
- the n-Si region 522 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the p-Si region 524 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the n+ Si region 525 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorous.
- the p+ GeSi region 531 receives an optical signal 535 and converts the optical signal 406 into electrical signals. Since the thickness of the p+ GeSi layer 531 is generally thin (e.g., 100 nm), the optical signal 535 propagates into the intrinsic GeSi region 533 , where the intrinsic GeSi region 533 absorbs the optical signal 535 and converts the optical signal 535 into free carriers.
- the optical signal 535 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 535 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a thickness of the intrinsic GeSi region 533 may be between 0.05 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
- the p+ GeSi region 531 may repel the photo-electrons away from the intrinsic GeSi region 533 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency.
- the p+ GeSi region 531 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 when the intrinsic GeSi region 533 is germanium and doped with boron.
- the generated free carriers in the intrinsic GeSi region 533 may drift or diffuse into the n-Si region 522 .
- a source supply voltage Vss may be applied to the NIR pixel 502 to create an electric field between the p+ GeSi region 531 and the n-Si region 522 , such that the free electrons may drift towards the n-Si region 522 while the free holes may drift towards the p+ GeSi region 531 .
- the second gate 526 may be coupled to the second control signal 527 .
- the second gate 526 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the second control signal 527 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the second control signal 527 controls a flow of free electrons from the n-Si region 522 to the n+ Si region 525 .
- a voltage of the second control signal 527 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the n-Si region 522 will drift towards the n+ Si region 525 .
- the n+ Si region 525 may be coupled to the second readout circuit 528 for further processing of the collected electrical signal.
- the second readout circuit 528 may be similar to the first readout circuit 418 as described in reference to FIG. 4A .
- the visible pixel 504 and the NIR pixel 502 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons.
- the p+ Si region 513 would be replaced by an n+ Si region
- the n-Si regions 512 and 522 would be replaced by p-Si regions
- the p-Si regions 514 and 524 would be replaced by n-Si regions
- the n+ Si region 515 and 525 would be replaced by p+ Si regions.
- FIG. 6 illustrates example photodiodes 600 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals.
- the photodiodes 600 includes a visible pixel 654 and an NIR pixel 652 .
- the visible pixel 654 is similar to the visible pixel 504 as described in reference to FIG. 5 .
- the NIR pixel 652 is similar to the NIR pixel 502 as described in reference to FIG. 5 .
- the surface of the visible pixel 654 and the NIR pixel 652 that receive optical signals 660 and 658 is a planarized surface, where the intrinsic GeSi region 662 and the p+ GeSi region 664 are embedded in an oxide layer 656 .
- a planarized surface between the visible pixel 654 and the NIR pixel 652 enables additional processing on the photodiode surface and/or bonding with devices fabricated on a separate substrate.
- time-of-flight (TOF) applications depth information of a three-dimensional object may be determined using a phase difference between a transmitted light pulse and a detected light pulse.
- a two-dimensional array of pixels may be used to reconstruct a three-dimensional image of a three-dimensional object, where each pixel may include one or more photodiodes for deriving phase information of the three-dimensional object.
- time-of-flight applications use light sources having wavelengths in the near-infrared (NIR) range.
- NIR near-infrared
- a light-emitting-diode (LED) may have a wavelength of 850 nm, 940 nm, 1050 nm, or 1310 nm.
- Some photodiodes may use silicon as an absorption material, but silicon is an inefficient absorption material for NIR wavelengths.
- photo-carriers may be generated deeply (e.g., greater than 10 ⁇ m in depth) in the silicon substrate, and those photo-carriers may drift and/or diffuse to the photodiode junction slowly, which results in a decrease in the device bandwidth.
- a small voltage swing is typically used to control photodiode operations in order to minimize power consumption.
- the small voltage swing can only create a small lateral/vertical field across the large absorption area, which affects the drift velocity of the photo-carriers being swept across the absorption area. The device bandwidth is therefore further limited.
- a multi-gate photodiode using germanium-silicon (GeSi) as an absorption material addresses the technical issues discussed above.
- FIG. 7 is an example multi-gate photodiode 700 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal.
- the multi-gate photodiode 700 includes an absorption layer 706 fabricated on a substrate 702 .
- the substrate 702 may be any suitable substrate where semiconductor devices can be fabricated on.
- the substrate 702 may be a silicon substrate.
- the coupling between the absorption layer 706 and a first n+ Si region 712 is controlled by a first gate 708 .
- the coupling between the absorption layer 706 and a second n+ Si region 714 is controlled by a second gate 710 .
- the absorption layer 706 receives an optical signal 712 and converts the optical signal 712 into electrical signals.
- the absorption layer 706 is selected to have a high absorption coefficient at the desired wavelength range.
- the absorption layer 706 may be a GeSi mesa, where the GeSi absorbs photons in the optical signal 712 and generates electron-hole pairs.
- the material composition of germanium and silicon in the GeSi mesa may be selected for specific processes or applications.
- the absorption layer 706 is designed to have a thickness t. For example, for 850 nm wavelength, the thickness of the GeSi mesa may be approximately 1 ⁇ m to have a substantial quantum efficiency.
- the surface of the absorption layer 706 is designed to have a specific shape.
- the GeSi mesa may be circular, square, or rectangular depending on the spatial profile of the optical signal 712 on the surface of the GeSi mesa.
- the absorption layer 706 is designed to have a lateral dimension d for receiving the optical signal 712 .
- the GeSi mesa may have a circular shape, where d can range from 1 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m.
- the absorption layer 706 may include a p+ GeSi region 731 .
- the p+ GeSi region 731 may repel the photo-electrons from the surface of the absorption region 706 and thereby may increase the device bandwidth.
- the p+ GeSi region 731 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 when the absorption region 706 is germanium and doped with boron.
- the multi-gate photodiode 700 includes an n-well region 704 implanted in the substrate 702 .
- the doping level of the n-well region 704 may range from 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 to 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 .
- the n-well region 704 is used to collect electrons generated by the absorption region 706 .
- the first gate 708 is coupled to a first control signal 722 and a first readout circuit 724 .
- the first gate 708 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the first control signal 722 may be a time-varying multi-level voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the first readout circuit 724 may be in a three-transistor configuration consisting of a reset gate, a source-follower, and a selection gate, or any suitable circuitry for processing free carriers.
- the first readout circuit 724 may be fabricated on the substrate 702 .
- the first readout circuit 724 may be fabricated on another substrate and co-packaged with the multi-gate photodiode 700 via die/wafer bonding or stacking.
- the second gate 710 is coupled to a second control signal 732 and a second readout circuit 734 .
- the second control signal 732 is similar to the first control signal 722
- the second readout circuit 734 is similar to the first readout circuit 724 .
- the first control signal 722 and the second control signal 732 are used to control the collection of electrons generated by the absorbed photons. For example, when the first gate 708 is turned “on” and the second gate is turned “off”, electrons would drift from the n-well region 704 to the n+ Si region 712 . Conversely, when the first gate 708 is turned “off” and the second gate is turned “on”, electrons would drift from the n-well region 704 to the n+ Si region 714 .
- a voltage may be applied between the p+ GeSi region 731 and the n-well 704 to increase the electric field inside the absorption layer 706 for drifting the electrons towards the n-well region 704 .
- FIG. 8 is an example multi-gate photodiode 800 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal.
- the multi-gate photodiode 800 includes an absorption layer 806 fabricated on a substrate 802 .
- the substrate 802 may be any suitable substrate where semiconductor devices can be fabricated on.
- the substrate 802 may be a silicon substrate.
- the coupling between the absorption layer 806 and a first p+ Si region 812 is controlled by a first gate 808 .
- the coupling between the absorption layer 806 and a second p+ Si region 814 is controlled by a second gate 810 .
- the absorption layer 806 receives an optical signal 812 and converts the optical signal 812 into electrical signals.
- the absorption layer 806 is similar to the absorption layer 706 as described in reference to FIG. 7 .
- the absorption layer 806 may include an n+ GeSi region 831 .
- the n+ GeSi region 831 may repel the holes from the surface of the absorption region 806 and thereby may increase the device bandwidth.
- the n+ GeSi region 831 may have a n+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 when the absorption region 806 is germanium and doped with phosphorus.
- the multi-gate photodiode 800 includes a p-well region 804 implanted in the substrate 802 .
- the doping level of the p-well region 804 may range from 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 to 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 .
- the p-well region 804 is used to collect holes generated by the absorption region 806 .
- the first gate 808 is coupled to a first control signal 822 and a first readout circuit 824 .
- the first gate 808 , the first control signal 822 , and the first readout circuit 824 are similar to the first gate 708 , the first control signal 722 , and the first readout circuit 724 as described in reference to FIG. 7 .
- the second gate 810 is coupled to a second control signal 832 and a second readout circuit 834 .
- the second gate 810 , the second control signal 832 , and the second readout circuit 834 are similar to the second gate 710 , the second control signal 732 , and the second readout circuit 734 as described in reference to FIG. 7
- the first control signal 822 and the second control signal 832 are used to control the collection of holes generated by the absorbed photons. For example, when the first gate 808 is turned “on” and the second gate 810 is turned “off”, holes would drift from the p-well region 804 to the p+ Si region 812 . Conversely, when the first gate 808 is turned “off” and the second gate 810 is turned “on”, holes would drift from the p-well region 804 to the p+ Si region 814 .
- a voltage may be applied between the n+ GeSi region 831 and the p-well 804 to increase the electric field inside the absorption layer 806 for drifting the holes towards the p-well region 804 .
- FIG. 9A shows an example photodetector 900 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal.
- the photodetector 900 includes an absorption layer 906 fabricated on a substrate 902 , and a first layer 908 formed on top of the absorption layer 906 and the substrate 902 .
- the substrates 902 may be similar to the substrate 702 described previously, and the absorption layers 906 may be similar to the absorption layer 706 described previously, and may be formed, for example, from Ge or GeSi with Ge concentration ranging from 1-99%.
- the background doping polarity and doping level of the Ge or GeSi absorption layer 906 may be P-type and range from 10 14 cm ⁇ 3 to 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 .
- the background doping level may be due to, for example, explicit incorporation of doping, or due to material defects introduced during formation of the absorption layer 906 .
- the absorption layer 906 of the photodetector 900 has a mesa structure and is supported by the substrate 902 , and while a vertical sidewall has been shown, the shape and sidewall profile of the mesa structure may depend on the specifics of the growth and fabrication process for the absorption layer 906 .
- the first layer 908 covers an upper surface and side surfaces of the absorption layer 906 , and covers a portion of an upper surface of the substrate 902 on which the absorption layer 906 is formed.
- the first layer 908 may be formed from a Complementary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor (CMOS) process compatible material (CPCM), such as amorphous silicon, polysilicon, epitaxial silicon, aluminum oxide family (e.g., Al 2 O 3 ), silicon oxide family (e.g., SiO 2 ), Ge oxide family (e.g., GeO 2 ), germanium-silicon family (e.g., Ge 0.4 Si 0.6 ), silicon nitride family (e.g., Si 3 N 4 ), high-k materials (e.g.
- CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
- the presence of the first layer 908 over the surfaces of the absorption layer 906 may have various effects.
- the first layer 908 may act as a surface passivation layer to the absorption layer 906 , which may reduce dark current or leakage current generated by defects present at the surface of the absorption layer 906 .
- the surface defects may be a significant source of dark current or leakage current, which contributes to an increased noise level of the photocurrent generated by the photodetector 900 .
- the dark current or leakage current may be reduced, thereby reducing the noise level of the photodetector 900 .
- the first layer 908 may modulate a Schottky barrier level between a contact formed on the photodetector 900 and the absorption layer 906 and/or the substrate 902 .
- the barrier modulation effect is further described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/908,328 titled “HIGH-SPEED LIGHT SENSING APPARATUS II,” which is fully incorporated by reference herein.
- FIG. 9B shows an example photodetector 910 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal.
- the photodetector 910 is similar to the photodetector 900 in FIG. 9A , but differs in that the absorption layer 906 is partially embedded in a recess formed on the substrate 902 , and the photodetector 910 further includes spacers 912 .
- the spacers 912 may be a dielectric material such as various oxides and nitrides that separates the sidewalls of the absorption layer 906 from the substrate 902 .
- the spaces 912 may be omitted, and the embedded portion of the absorption layer 906 may be in direct contact with a surface of the recess formed in the substrate 902 , such as a [ 110 ] sidewall of a silicon substrate.
- FIG. 9C shows an example photodetector 920 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal.
- the photodetector 920 is similar to the photodetector 910 in FIG. 9B , but differs in that the absorption layer 906 is fully embedded in the recess formed on the substrate 902 .
- photodiodes illustrated and described in relation to FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have germanium regions or absorption layers that are protruding from a surface of the substrate in a manner similar to the photodiode 900 shown in FIG. 9A
- the previously described photodiodes may be formed to have partially embedded or fully embedded germanium regions or absorption layers as shown in FIG. 9B and FIG. 9C .
- FIG. 10A shows an example band diagram 1000 across a silicon substrate and a germanium mesa.
- the band diagram 1000 illustrates various energy levels that charge carriers such as electrons and holes experience at various locations of the silicon-germanium heterojunction.
- the vertical axis corresponds to an energy level E
- the horizontal axis corresponds to a position x across the heterojunction formed between the silicon substrate and the germanium mesa.
- the silicon substrate and the germanium mesa have respective valence bands with energy level of Ev,si and Ev,ge, and respective conduction bands with energy level of Ec,si, and Ec,ge.
- Intrinsic fermi levels Ei,si and Ei,ge for silicon and germanium, respectively, have been marked for reference.
- the energy level of the conduction band of silicon (Ec,si) is approximately 0.05 eV lower than the energy level of the conduction band of germanium (Ec,ge), and the energy level of the valence band of silicon (Ev,si) is approximately 0.4 eV lower than the energy level of the valence band of germanium (Ev,ge).
- the fermi level of the semiconductor is at the mid-point between the conduction band and the valence band.
- the intrinsic fermi level of silicon (Ei,si) is approximately 0.27 eV lower than the intrinsic fermi level of germanium (Ei,ge).
- Such misalignment in the fermi levels across a Si—Ge heterojunction creates a built-in potential and a depletion region, which impedes a flow of current across the heterojunction.
- the built-in potential may be overcome by an application of external bias voltage across the heterojunction.
- increasing the external bias voltage may be undesirable in certain cases.
- increased external bias voltage may increase a dark current generated by a photodiode implementing the Si—Ge heterojunction, increase a power consumed by the photodiode implementing the Si—Ge heterojunction, or a combination thereof.
- the fermi levels of silicon and germanium may be aligned in various ways to reduce or eliminate the built-in potential.
- the techniques include 1) doping Ge with P-type dopants, 2) doping Si with N-type dopants, 3) doping Ge with P-type dopants in combination with doping Si with N-type dopants, 4) doping both Ge and Si with N-type dopants, and 5) a combination thereof.
- concentrations of the dopants for various scenarios may be determined through standard band-diagram calculations, taking into account the polarity and concentration of an intrinsic doping of a material, and/or an intrinsic carrier concentration of the material.
- the calculation has been performed for techniques 1) to 4) described above assuming an intrinsic carrier concentration n i,si of 10 10 cm ⁇ 3 for silicon and an intrinsic carrier concentration of n i,ge of 2*10 13 cm ⁇ 3 for germanium.
- the Fermi energy level of a semiconductor doped with N-type or P-type dopant at the concentration N D or N A , respectively, is higher than or lower than, respectively, the mid-gap energy level of the semiconductor.
- the change in the Fermi energy level due to the doping can be calculated by the equations k B T*ln(N D /n i,si ) and k B T*ln(N A /n i,si ), respectively, wherein kB is the Boltzmann constant and T is the temperature.
- germanium may be doped with Boron at a concentration of approximately 4*10 17 cm ⁇ 3 (e.g., 6.47*10 17 cm ⁇ 3 ).
- silicon may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration of approximately 3*10 14 cm ⁇ 3 (e.g., 3.24*10 14 cm ⁇ 3 ).
- germanium may be doped with boron at a concentration less than 6.47*10 17 cm ⁇ 3 (e.g., 4*10 17 cm ⁇ 3 or less) in combination with doping silicon with phosphorous at a concentration less than 3.24*10 14 cm ⁇ 3 (e.g., 3*10 14 cm ⁇ 3 or less).
- germanium may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to G*10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ P cm ⁇ 3 in combination with doping silicon with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 16*G*10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ P cm ⁇ 3 .
- the fourth technique may be advantageous over the first, second, and third techniques for various reasons.
- the parameters G and P are tunable parameters that may be tuned to control widths of the depletion regions formed around the Si—Ge heterojunction.
- the parameters G and P may be tuned such that the resulting doping level falls within a level that can be reliably achieved using standard integrated circuit fabrication techniques.
- a doping level above 1*10 16 cm ⁇ 3 may be readily achieved using standard dopant implantation techniques.
- germanium may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 5*10 17 cm ⁇ 3 and silicon may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 8*10 18 cm ⁇ 3 .
- Dopant concentrations that are “approximately X” or are “substantially equal to X” may correspond to a range of values that are functionally equivalent to the numerical concentration X, and/or a concentration that is within a fabrication variation of the provided value. For example, a doping concentration that falls within 1%, within 5%, within 25%, or within 50% of X may be considered to be “approximately” or “substantially equal to” X. As another example, a doping concentration that effectively performs the same function as the numerical concentration X, such as reducing or eliminating the built-in potential to a similar degree as X, may be considered to be “approximately” or “substantially equal to” X.
- the silicon-germanium alloy of various compositions may have corresponding conduction band energy level, valence band energy level, and intrinsic fermi level, which may be determined and used in calculating the appropriate doping concentrations for the various techniques that are described.
- FIG. 10B an example photodiode 1010 with reduced built-in potential is shown.
- the photodiode 1010 includes the substrate 902 , the absorption layer 906 , the first layer 908 , an n-doped region 1030 , a p-doped region 1031 , an n-well 1032 , the gate 710 , and the n+ Si region 714 .
- the operation of the photodiode 1010 is generally similar to the operation of the photodiode 700 except as described.
- the p-doped region 1031 is arranged on a first surface of the absorption region 906 facing away from the surface of the substrate 902 .
- the p-doped region 1031 may repel the photo-electrons from the surface of the absorption region 906 and may thereby increase the device bandwidth.
- the p-doped region 1031 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 , when the absorption region 906 is germanium and doped with boron.
- the p-doped region 1031 may be similar to the p+ GeSi region 731 where the absorption region 906 is a GeSi absorption region.
- the n-doped region 1030 is arranged on a second surface of the absorption region 906 facing the surface of the substrate 902 .
- the second surface may be opposite from the first surface of the absorption region 906 .
- the n-doped region 1030 may be formed by implantation of dopants into the absorption region 906 , or may be formed by diffusing the dopants from the n-well 1032 .
- the configuration of the photodiode 1010 in which the p-doped region 1031 and the n-doped region 1030 are vertically separated within the absorption region 906 may be referred to as a vertical PIN photodiode.
- the n-well 1032 is an n-doped region formed in the substrate 902 .
- the n-well 1032 may be formed by implantation of dopants into the substrate 902 .
- the n-well 1032 is used to collect photo-generated carriers generated by the absorption region 906 .
- a voltage may be applied between the p-doped region 1031 and the n-well 1032 to increase the electric field inside the absorption region 906 for drifting the electrons towards the n-well 1032 .
- Photo-generated carriers such as electrons generated by the absorption region 906 may be repelled by the p-doped region 1031 toward the heterojunction interface between the absorption region 906 and the silicon substrate 902 .
- the n-doped region 1030 and the n-well 1032 are configured to align the fermi levels of the absorption region 906 and the silicon substrate 902 such that the photo-generated carriers may flow across the heterojunction.
- a first doping concentration of the n-doped region 1030 may be less than or substantially equal to a second doping concentration of the n-well 1032 . Such doping concentrations may lead to a reduction of misalignment between the fermi levels across the heterojunction.
- the n-doped region 1030 may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to G*10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ P cm ⁇ 3
- the n-well 1032 may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 16*G*10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ P cm ⁇ 3 to substantially align the fermi levels across the heterojunction.
- the n-doped region 1030 and the n-well 1032 are adjacent to each other (e.g., in direct contact without intervening layers).
- an intervening layer e.g., a silicon-germanium layer
- a readout region generally refers to a region of a photodiode where the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode may be collected, or read-out, by a circuit such as the readout circuit 734 .
- Examples of the readout regions include n+ Si regions 415 , 425 , 515 , 525 , 712 , and 714 , and p+ Si regions 812 , and 814 .
- the readout circuit 734 is coupled to the readout region to read-out the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode 1010 .
- the gate 710 is formed over a surface of the substrate 902 .
- a dielectric layer may be present between the substrate 902 and the gate 710 and provide support to the gate 710 .
- the gate 710 is supported by the substrate 902 .
- the readout region e.g., n+ Si region 714 ) is formed on the surface of the substrate 902 , and is thereby supported by the substrate 902 .
- a capacitor may be coupled to the readout region of the photodiode 1010 .
- the capacitors include floating-diffusion capacitors, metal-oxide-metal (MOM) capacitors, metal-insulator-metal (MIM) capacitors, and metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) capacitors.
- a floating-diffusion capacitor may be integrally formed in the readout region.
- the n+Si region 714 may implement a floating-diffusion capacitor, which may simultaneously function as a channel terminal for the MOSFET 1040 , as a capacitor for storing photo-generated carriers, and as a readout region.
- the capacitor coupled to the readout region may integrate the photo-generated carriers generated by the absorption region 906 , which may be read-out by the readout circuit 734 .
- the n-well 1032 , the gate 710 , and the n+ Si region 714 may form a metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) 1040 that controls a flow of current between the n-well 1032 and the n+ Si region 714 .
- the substrate 902 may be a P-type silicon substrate, and a portion of the substrate 902 located under the gate 710 may act as a channel of the MOSFET 1040 .
- a portion of the n-well 1032 that is proximal or underneath the gate 710 , or the entire n-well 1032 may be referred to as a channel terminal (e.g., first channel terminal) of the MOSFET 1040 .
- a portion of the n+Si region 714 that is proximal or underneath the gate 710 , or the entire n+ Si region 714 , may be referred to as a channel terminal (e.g., second channel terminal) of the MOSFET 1040 .
- the first and second channel terminals may also be referred to as source and drain terminal of the MOSFET 1040 . Additional description associated with operation of a MOSFET will be provided in relation to FIG. 24A .
- the photodiode 1010 described has a single gate 710 , additional gates may be provided.
- the gate 708 , the control signal 722 , the n+ Si region 712 , and the readout circuit 724 of FIG. 7 may be implemented in the photodiode 1010 to implement multi-gate photodiode 1010 that operates in a manner analogous to the multi-gate photodiode 700 of FIG. 7 .
- the photodiode 1012 is similar to the photodiode 1010 of FIG. 10B , but differs in that the absorption region 906 is now partially embedded in a recess formed on the substrate 902 , and the photodiode 1020 further includes the spacers 912 .
- the n-well 1032 surrounds at least a portion of the recess, thereby surrounding at least a portion of the absorption region 906 . In some implementations, the n-well 1032 fully surrounds the embedded portion of the absorption region 906 .
- the photo-generated carriers may travel downward through the heterojunction formed between the absorption region 906 and the silicon substrate 902 .
- the photo-generated carriers may then be guided by the n-well 1032 toward the gate 710 such that the transport of the photo-generated carriers between the n-well 1032 and the n-doped region 714 may be controlled by the gate 710 .
- the spacers 912 may be electrically insulating (e.g., SiO 2 ), semiconducting (e.g., undoped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon), or conducting (e.g., doped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon). While the photodiode 1012 described includes the spacers 912 , in some implementations, the spacers 912 may be omitted.
- the photodiode 1012 described has a single gate 710 , additional gates may be provided.
- the gate 708 , the control signal 722 , the n+ Si region 712 , and the readout circuit 724 of FIG. 7 may be implemented in the photodiode 1012 to implement a multi-gate photodiode 1012 that operates in a manner analogous to the multi-gate photodiode 700 of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 10D an example photodiode 1014 with reduced built-in potential is shown.
- the photodiode 1014 is similar to the photodiode 1012 of FIG. 10C , but differs in that the absorption region 906 is now fully embedded in the recess formed on the substrate 902 .
- the n-well 1032 surrounds at least a portion of the recess, thereby surrounding at least a portion of the absorption region 906 . In some implementations, the n-well 1032 fully surrounds the embedded portion of the absorption region 906 .
- the p-doped region 1031 is in contact with (e.g., adjacent) to the n-doped region 1030 .
- the photo-generated carriers may travel laterally through the heterojunction formed between the absorption region 906 and the silicon substrate 902 to be collected by the n-well 1032 .
- the transport of carriers collected by the n-well 1032 between the n-well 1032 and the n-doped region 714 may be controlled by the gate 710 .
- the spacers 912 may be semiconducting (e.g., undoped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon), or conducting (e.g., doped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon). While the photodiode 1014 described includes the spacers 912 , in some implementations, the spacers 912 may be omitted.
- the p-doped region 1031 and the n-doped region 1030 is shown to be adjacent to each other, in some implementations, the p-doped region 1031 and the n-doped region 1030 may be vertically separated.
- n-doped region 1030 is shown to not extend across the lateral extents of the absorption region 906 , in some implementations, the n-doped region 1030 may fully extend across the lateral extents of the absorption region 906 .
- the photodiode 1014 described has a single gate 710 , additional gates may be provided.
- the gate 708 , the control signal 722 , the n+ Si region 712 , and the readout circuit 724 of FIG. 7 may be implemented in the photodiode 1014 to implement a multi-gate photodiode 1014 that operates in a manner analogous to the multi-gate photodiode 700 of FIG. 7 .
- the gate 710 for controlling the transport of carriers between the absorption region 906 and the readout region 714 have been described in relation to FIGS. 10B through 10D , other control mechanisms have been contemplated.
- the gate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped base terminal to form an NPN bipolar junction transistor in place of the MOSFET 1040 to control a flow of carriers to the readout region.
- the gate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped gate terminal and an n-doped channel to form an N-channel junction field effect transistor (JFET) in place of the MOSFET 1040 .
- JFET junction field effect transistor
- Fermi-level alignment between the absorption region 906 and the silicon substrate 902 is one of the considerations in improving the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to the readout region of a photodiode. Now, additional considerations and techniques for improving the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to capacitors associated with the photodiode will be described.
- FIG. 11A an example photodiode 1100 with improved carrier transfer is shown.
- the photodiode 1100 is similar to the photodiode 1014 of FIG. 10D , but differs in that the n-well 1032 has been replaced with a second n-doped region 1132 , and the first n-doped region 1030 and the second n-doped region 1132 is coupled with an interconnect 1150 . Additionally, both the p-doped region 1031 and the first n-doped region 1030 are arranged on the first surface of the absorption region 906 away from the substrate 902 , which may be referred as a lateral PIN photodiode.
- the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 is an n-doped region formed within the silicon substrate 902 .
- the PN junction formed between the n-doped region of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 and the P-type silicon substrate 902 further confines carriers to the n-doped region of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 , improving the storage of carriers by the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 , relative to the case where the silicon substrate 902 is not doped with P-type dopants.
- the first n-doped region 1030 has a first doping concentration n 1 .
- the second n-doped region 1132 has a second doping concentration n 2 . Different from the n-well 1032 , the second n-doped region 1132 is not adjacent to the first n-doped region 1030 . For example, the second n-doped region does not physically contact the first n-doped region 1030 .
- the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 has a third doping concentration n 3 .
- the interconnect 1150 provides an electrical coupling between the first n-doped region 1030 and the second n-doped region 1132 .
- the electrical coupling provided by the interconnect 1150 allows the photo-generated carriers generated in the absorption region and received by the first n-doped region 1030 to be transported to the second n-doped region 1132 without physical contact or adjacency between the two n-doped regions.
- the interconnect 1150 may be formed using various metals, such as aluminum, copper, and tungsten, and may include a contact metal at the interface to the first n-doped region 1030 and the second n-doped region 1132 .
- the general operation of the photodiode 1100 is as follows. Photo-generated carriers such as electrons generated by the absorption region 906 may be repelled by the p-doped region 1031 toward the first n-doped region 1030 . Once the photo-generated carriers reach the first n-doped region 1030 , additional force may be imparted on the carriers to induce a flow of those carriers from the first n-doped region 1030 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when the MOSFET 1040 is turned on.
- Such force may be generated by engineering of the doping concentrations n 1 of the first n-doped region 1030 , n 2 of the second n-doped region 1132 , and n 3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 .
- a charge carrier is driven from a region of low doping concentration to a region of high doping concentration, as the potential energy associated with a region of lower doping concentration is higher than the potential energy associated with a region of higher doping concentration.
- the carriers stored at the first n-doped region 1030 may be first driven toward the second n-doped region 1132 having the second doping concentration n 2 higher than the first doping concentration n 1 . Then, when the MOSFET 1040 is turned on, the difference in doping concentration n 2 of the second n-doped region 1132 and n 3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 further drives the carriers toward the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 . As a result, the carrier transfer efficiency from the absorption region 906 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 may be improved.
- FIG. 11B an example photodiode 1102 with improved carrier transfer is shown.
- the photodiode 1102 is similar to the photodiode 1100 of FIG. 11A , but differs in that the first n-doped region 1030 has been extended to a right lateral edge of the absorption region 906 , and the second n-doped region 1132 has been extended to the right lateral edge of the absorption region 906 , such that the n-doped regions 1030 and 1132 meet at the heterojunction interface between the absorption region 906 and the substrate 902 .
- the adjacency between the n-doped regions 1030 and 1132 may allow the photo-generated carriers to flow between the two regions without the interconnect 1150 of FIG. 11A .
- FIG. 11C an example photodiode 1104 with improved carrier transfer is shown.
- the photodiode 1104 is similar to the photodiode 1102 of FIG. 11B , but differs in that the second n-doped region 1132 is now a second n-doped region 1133 that surrounds the absorption region 906 , and isolation structures 1150 have been added.
- the second n-doped region 1133 is similar to the second n-doped region 1132 , but differs in that the second n-doped region 1133 surrounds the embedded portion of the absorption region 906 .
- the second n-doped region 1133 may be formed by etching a recess into the substrate 902 , defining an implantation mask that opens the region surrounding the recess, and implanting N-type dopants into the recess to form the second n-doped region that surrounds the recess.
- the second n-doped region 1133 of FIG. 11C may have a relaxed alignment tolerance relative to the second n-doped region 1132 of FIG. 11B , as the configuration of FIG.
- the isolation structures 1150 may increase the electrical isolation between the photodiode 1104 and other electrical components that may be present on the substrate 902 , such as other photodiodes 1104 .
- the isolation structure 1150 extends from an upper surface of the substrate 902 and into a predetermined depth from the upper surface.
- the isolation structure 1150 is a doped region that has been doped with P-type dopants or N-type dopants. The doping of the isolation structure 1150 may create a bandgap offset-induced potential energy barrier that impedes a flow of current across the isolation structure 1150 , improving electrical isolation between the photodiode 1104 and surrounding components.
- the isolation structure 1150 is a trench filled with a semiconductor material that is different from the substrate 902 .
- An interface between two different semiconductors formed between the substrate 902 and the isolation structure 1150 may create a bandgap offset-induced energy barrier that impedes a flow of current across the isolation structure 1150 , improving electrical isolation between the photodiode 1104 and surrounding components.
- the isolation structure 1150 is a trench filled with a dielectric or an insulator. The isolation structure 1150 filled with a low conductivity dielectric or insulator may provide a region of high electrical resistance, impeding a flow of current across the isolation structure 1150 , improving electrical isolation between the photodiode 1104 and surrounding components.
- FIG. 11D an example photodiode 1106 with improved carrier transfer is shown.
- the photodiode 1106 is similar to the photodiode 1104 of FIG. 11C , but differs in that the spacers 912 of FIG. 9B have been added, and the first n-doped region 1030 has moved to the bottom surface of the absorption region 906 that interfaces with the substrate 902 .
- the p-doped region 1031 and the first n-doped region 1030 forms a vertical PIN diode.
- the spacers 912 may provide electrical isolation along the vertical sidewalls of the absorption region 906 from the silicon substrate 902 , and confines the flow of the photo-generated carriers in a vertical direction along the absorption region 906 .
- the photo-generated carriers are collected by the second n-doped region 1133 at the bottom interface between the absorption region 906 and the substrate 902 , which are in turn driven towards the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when the MOSFET 1040 is turned on.
- the first doping region 1030 may be formed by diffusing the dopants of the second doping region 1333 into the absorption region 906 (e.g., through thermal processing). Because the diffusion-based formation of the region 1030 removes a dopant implantation step, the photodiode 1106 may be simpler to fabricate compared to the photodiode 1104 of FIG. 11C .
- Photodiodes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , and 1106 utilize a difference in the doping concentrations across the first n-doped region 1030 , the second n-doped regions 1132 or 1133 , and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 to drive the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when the MOSFET 1040 is turned on.
- Another technique for improving the carrier transfer is by utilizing a charge sharing effect across capacitances associated with different doped regions. Referring to FIG. 11E , an example photodiode 1108 with improved carrier transfer is shown. The photodiode 1108 is similar to the photodiode 1100 of FIG.
- the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 has a capacitance substantially larger than respective capacitances associated with the first n-doped region 1130 and the second n-doped region 1134 .
- a fourth doping concentration n 4 of the first n-doped region 1130 , a fifth doping concentration n 5 of the second n-doped region 1134 , and a sixth doping concentration n 6 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 may be high (e.g., greater than 5*10 19 cm ⁇ 3 ) and substantially similar (e.g., within 1%, within 5%, within 10%, or within 20% of a value X).
- n 4 , n 5 , and n 6 may be substantially equal to 1*10 20 cm ⁇ 3 .
- a high doping concentration reduces the metal-semiconductor contact resistance, which is turn decreases the associated RC time constant of charge sharing, resulting in a faster carrier transfer.
- the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 can be made to be substantially larger than that of the n-doped regions 1130 and 1134 .
- doped regions such as the first n-doped region 1130 , the second n-doped region 1134 , and the n-doped region forming the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 , may form PN junctions with the surrounding material, such as the absorption region 906 or the substrate 902 .
- junction capacitances contribute junction capacitances, which further increase the capacitances associated with the first n-doped region 1130 , the second n-doped region 1134 , and the n-doped region forming the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 .
- the junction capacitances may depend on various factors including the physical sizes and the doping concentrations of the doped regions.
- the capacitances of the first n-doped region 1130 , the second n-doped region 1134 , and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 are electrically coupled in parallel when the MOSFET 1040 is turned on.
- the capacitors share a common voltage across its terminals through a process referred to as charge sharing.
- the charge Q stored by the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 can be made to be substantially larger than the charge stored by the n-doped regions 1130 and 1134 , thereby improving carrier transfer efficiency from the absorption region 906 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 .
- the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 may be at least 10 times larger (e.g., 20 times larger, 40 times larger, or 50 times larger) than a combined capacitance of the first n-doped region 1130 and the second n-doped region 1134 .
- the doping engineering described in relation to FIGS. 11A-11D may be implemented in combination with the charge-sharing technique of FIG. 11E .
- the doping concentrations may be set to satisfy the inequality n 4 ⁇ n 5 ⁇ n 6 , while simultaneously ensuring that the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 is substantially larger than the combined capacitances of the n-doped regions 1130 and 1134 .
- the capacitance associated with the readout region may be increased by coupling a separate capacitor such as a metal-oxide-metal (MOM) capacitor, a metal-insulator-metal (MIM) capacitor, or a metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) capacitor.
- MOM metal-oxide-metal
- MIM metal-insulator-metal
- MOS metal-oxide-semiconductor
- the added capacitance by the separate capacitor may provide benefits analogous to the increasing of the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 .
- the separate capacitor may be coupled to the readout region in parallel with the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 to further increase the capacitance of the readout region.
- FIG. 11F an example photodiode 1109 with improved carrier transfer is shown.
- the photodiode 1109 is similar to the photodiode 1100 of FIG. 11A , but differs in that the MOSFET 1040 is now supported by the absorption region 906 .
- the relocation of the MOSFET 1040 to be supported entirely within the absorption region 906 eliminates a need for the second n-doped region 1132 formed on the silicon substrate 902 and the interconnect 1150 that coupled the second n-doped region 1132 to the first n-doped region 1030 . In this configuration, the photo-generated carriers generated within the absorption region 906 does not flow from the absorption region 906 to the substrate 902 .
- the photo-generated carriers flow directly from the absorption region 906 to the readout circuit 734 under control of the gate 710 .
- the photo-generated carriers do not experience a built-in potential across the absorption region 906 and the substrate 902 .
- the difference between the first doping concentration n 1 of the first n-doped region 1030 and the third doping concentration n 3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 may improve carrier transfer between the first n-doped region 1030 and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 .
- a capacitor may be coupled to the readout region of the photodiode 1109 , such as the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 .
- the capacitors include MOM, MIM, and MOS capacitors.
- the gate 710 for controlling the transport of carriers between the absorption region 906 and the readout region 1140 and 1142 have been described in relation to FIGS. 11A through 11F , other control mechanisms have been contemplated.
- the gate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped base terminal to form an NPN bipolar junction transistor in place of the MOSFET 1040 to control a flow of carriers to the readout region.
- the gate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped gate terminal and an n-doped channel to form an N-channel junction field effect transistor (JFET) in place of the MOSFET 1040 .
- JFET junction field effect transistor
- Photodiodes 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , and 1109 described in relation to FIGS. 11A through 11F are fabricated on the substrate 902 , and hence supported by substrate 902 .
- various components of the photodiodes may be separately fabricated on different semiconductor wafers, and be bonded to each other using various wafer bonding techniques to form a photodiode.
- FIG. 11G a wafer-bonded photodiode 1160 is shown.
- the wafer-bonded photodiode 1160 is similar to the photodiode 1100 of FIG.
- the absorption region 906 , the p-doped region 1031 , and the first n-doped region 1030 are now supported by a first semiconductor layer 1170
- the second n-doped region 1132 , the gate 710 , and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 are now supported by a second semiconductor layer 1172 .
- the first semiconductor layer 1170 and the second semiconductor layer 1172 may be semiconductor wafers, such as a silicon wafer used in standard integrated circuit fabrication processes.
- the operation of the photodiode 1160 is analogous to the operation of the photodiode 1100 .
- the first semiconductor layer 1170 may be separately processed from the second semiconductor layer 1172 .
- the first semiconductor layer 1170 may be processed using a first fabrication process specialized for forming absorption region 906
- the second semiconductor layer 1172 may be processed using a second fabrication process specialized for forming the gate 710 .
- the second fabrication process may be, for example, a sub 100 nm CMOS fabrication process for forming high-density digital circuits.
- a first portion of the interconnect 1150 may be fabricated during the processing of the first semiconductor layer 1170
- a second portion of the interconnect 1150 may be fabricated during the processing of the second semiconductor layer 1172 .
- the processed first and second semiconductor layers 1170 and 1172 may then be bonded at a bonding interface 1174 , mechanically coupling the first and second semiconductor layers 1170 and 1172 , and electrically coupling the absorption region 906 to the second n-doped region 1132 .
- the entity that results from bonding of the first and second layers 1170 and 1172 may be referred to as a substrate. Additional details regarding wafer bonding will be described later in relation to FIGS. 17A-17D and FIGS. 19A through 20F .
- the bonding of the first and semiconductor layers 1170 and 1172 may optically obscure the first surface of the absorption region 906 facing the second semiconductor layer 1172 .
- an optical signal 1180 may enter the absorption region 906 from a second surface of the first semiconductor layer 1170 opposite to the surface where the absorption region 906 is formed.
- This illumination configuration may be referred to as back-side illumination.
- a wafer-bonded photodiode 1162 is shown.
- the wafer-bonded photodiode 1162 is similar to the photodiode 1108 of FIG. 11E , but differs in that the absorption region 906 , the p-doped region 1031 , and the first n-doped region 1130 are now supported by the first semiconductor layer 1170 , and the second n-doped region 1134 , the gate 710 , and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 are now supported by the second semiconductor layer 1172 .
- the fabrication process of the photodiode 1162 is similar to the fabrication process of the photodiode 1160 , and the operation of the photodiode 1162 is analogous to the operation of the photodiode 1108 .
- FIG. 12 illustrates example photodiodes 1200 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals.
- the example photodiodes 1200 includes an NIR pixel 1202 for collecting holes and a visible pixel 1204 for collecting electrons, where the NIR pixel 1202 and the visible pixel 1204 are formed on a common substrate.
- the NIR pixel 1202 and the visible pixel 1204 are not separated by an isolation structure.
- the NIR pixel 1202 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range.
- the visible pixel 1204 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red).
- the NIR pixel 1202 and the visible pixel 1204 may be photodiodes in the sensor layer 108 as described in reference to FIG. 1 , for example.
- the visible pixel 1204 is configured to collect free electrons generated from photo-generated carriers, and includes an n-Si region 1212 , an n+ Si region 1214 , an p-Si region 1220 , a first gate 1216 , a first control signal 1217 coupled to the first gate 1216 , and a first readout circuit 1218 coupled to the n+ Si region 1214 .
- the n-Si region 1212 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the n+ Si region 1214 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorous.
- the p-Si region 1220 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 10 16 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the p-Si layer 1220 receives an optical signal 1222 . Since the thickness of the p-Si layer 1220 is generally thin (e.g., 50-100 nm), the optical signal 1222 propagates into the n-Si region 1212 , where the n-Si region 1212 absorbs the optical signal 1222 and converts the optical signal 1222 into free carriers.
- the optical signal 1222 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 1222 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- the first gate 1216 may be coupled to the first control signal 1217 .
- the first gate 1216 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the first control signal 1217 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the first control signal 1217 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p-Si region 1220 to the n+ Si region 1214 .
- the n+ Si region 1214 may be coupled to the first readout circuit 1218 that processes the collected electrical signal.
- the first readout circuit 1218 may be similar to the first readout circuit 418 as described in reference to FIG. 4A .
- the NIR pixel 1202 is configured to collect free holes generated from photo-generated carriers, and includes an n-Si region 1242 , a p+ Si region 1244 , a second gate 1246 , a second control signal 1247 coupled to the second gate 1246 , a second readout circuit 1248 coupled to the p+ Si region 1244 , a n+ GeSi region 1250 , an intrinsic GeSi region 1252 , a p-Ge region 1254 , and an oxide region 1256 .
- the NIR pixel 1202 shares the p-Si region 1220 with the VIS pixel 1204 .
- the n-Si region 1242 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 10 15 cm ⁇ 3 with phosphorus.
- the p+ Si region 1244 may have an p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 with boron.
- the n+ GeSi region 1250 receives an optical signal 1260 and converts the optical signal 1260 into electrical signals.
- the optical signal 1260 propagates into the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 , where the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 absorbs the optical signal 1260 and converts the optical signal 1260 into free carriers.
- the optical signal 1260 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in the filter layer 110 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a beam profile of the optical signal 1260 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in the lens layer 112 as described in reference to FIG. 1 .
- a thickness of the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 may be between 0.05 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
- the n+ GeSi region 1250 may repel the holes generated away from from the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency.
- the n+ GeSi region 1250 may have a n+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5 ⁇ 10 20 cm ⁇ 3 when the intrinsic GeSi region 1250 is germanium and doped with phosphorus.
- the photo-generated free holes in the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 may drift or diffuse into the p-Si region 1220 .
- the photo-generated free electrons in the intrinsic GeSi region 1252 may be repelled by the p-GeSi region 1254 , which prevents the free electrons from entering the p-Si region 1220 .
- a drain supply voltage V DD may be applied to the NIR pixel 1202 to create an electric field between the n+ GeSi region 1250 and the p-Si region 1220 , such that the free holes may drift towards the p-Si region 1220 while the free electrons may drift towards the n+ GeSi region 1250 .
- the second gate 1246 may be coupled to the second control signal 1247 .
- the second gate 1246 may be coupled to a voltage source, where the second control signal 1247 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source.
- the second control signal 1247 controls a flow of free holes from the p-Si region 1220 to the p+ Si region 1244 .
- a voltage of the second control signal 1247 exceeds a threshold voltage, free holes accumulated in the p-Si region 1220 will drift towards the p+ Si region 1244 .
- the p+ Si region 1244 may be coupled to the second readout circuit 1248 for further processing of the collected electrical signal.
- the visible pixel 1204 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons and the NIR pixel 1202 may alternatively be fabricated to collect electrons instead of holes.
- the p-Si region 1220 would be replaced by an n-Si region
- the n-Si regions 1242 and 1212 would be replaced by p-Si regions
- the p+ Si region 1244 would be replaced by an n+ Si region
- the n+ Si region 1214 would be replaced by a p+ Si region
- the n+ GeSi region 1250 would be replaced by a p+ GeSi region
- the p-GeSi region 1254 would be replaced by an n-GeSi region.
- the direction of light signal shown in FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 may be reversed depending on designs, packaging, and applications.
- the optical signal 406 may enter the NIR pixel 402 through the p+ Si region 423 , propagate through the n-Si region 422 , and then be absorbed by the intrinsic GeSi region 433 .
- FIG. 13 shows a top view of an example integrated photodiode array 1300 for detecting visible and NIR light as well as for a TOF application.
- the photodiode array 1300 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1302 and a VIS pixel 1304 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1302 includes an NIR gate 1306 , a first TOF gate 1312 , and a second TOF gate 1314 .
- the VIS pixel 1304 includes a VIS gate 1308 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1302 and the VIS pixel 1304 are not isolated by an isolation structure.
- the controls of the charge readout using the NIR gate 1306 and the VIS gate 1308 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 1200 as described in reference to FIG. 12 .
- the controls of the charge readout using the TOF gates 1312 and 1314 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference to FIG. 7 , the multi-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference to FIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , and 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the readout circuits coupled to the NIR gate 1306 and the TOF gates 1312 and 1314 would collect the same type of carriers, and the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1008 would collect the opposite type of carriers. For example, if the readout circuits of the NIR gate 1306 and the TOF gates 1312 and 1314 are configured to collect electrons, the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1308 would be configured to collect holes. Conversely, if the readout circuits of the NIR gate 1306 and the TOF gates 1312 and 1314 are configured to collect holes, the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1308 would be configured to collect electrons.
- FIG. 14 shows a top view of an example integrated photodiode array 1400 for detecting visible light and for a TOF application.
- the photodiode array 1400 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1402 and a VIS pixel 1404 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1402 includes a first TOF gate 1412 , and a second TOF gate 1414 .
- the VIS pixel 1404 includes a VIS gate 1408 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1402 and the VIS pixel 1404 are not isolated by an isolation structure.
- the controls of the charge readout using the VIS gate 1408 and the TOF gate 1412 or 1414 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 1200 as described in reference to FIG. 12 .
- the controls of the charge readout using the TOF gates 1412 and 1414 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference to FIG. 7 , the multi-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference to FIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , and 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the readout circuits coupled to the TOF gates 1412 and 1414 would collect the same type of carriers, and the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1408 would collect the opposite type of carriers.
- the readout circuits of the TOF gates 1412 and 1414 are configured to collect electrons
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1408 would be configured to collect holes.
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1408 would be configured to collect electrons.
- FIG. 15 shows a top view of an example integrated photodiode array 1500 for detecting visible and NIR light as well as for a TOF application.
- the photodiode array 1500 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and a VIS pixel 1504 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1502 includes an NIR gate 1506 , a first TOF gate 1512 , and a second TOF gate 1514 .
- the VIS pixel 1504 includes a VIS gate 1508 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and the VIS pixel 1504 are isolated by an isolation structure.
- the controls of the charge readout using the NIR gate 1506 and the VIS gate 1508 are similar to the photodiodes 400 as described in reference to FIG.
- the controls of the charge readout using the NIR gate 1506 are similar to the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , or 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the controls of the charge readout using the TOF gates 1506 and 1508 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference to FIG.
- the multi-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference to FIG. 8 or the multi-gate versions of the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , and 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the readout circuits coupled to the NIR gate 1506 and the TOF gates 1512 and 1514 would collect the same type of carriers, and the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1508 may or may not collect the same type of carriers.
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1508 may be configured to collect holes or electrons depending on the design because the NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and the VIS pixel 1504 are isolated.
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1508 may be configured to collect holes or electrons.
- FIG. 16 shows a top view of an example integrated photodiode array 1600 for detecting visible light as well as for a TOF application.
- the photodiode array 1600 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and a VIS pixel 1604 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1602 includes a first TOF gate 1606 , a second TOF gate 1612 , a third TOF gate 1614 , and a fourth TOF gate 1616 .
- the four TOF gates may be used to extract additional phase information about the collected signal.
- the VIS pixel 1604 includes a VIS gate 1608 .
- the NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and the VIS pixel 1604 are isolated by an isolation structure.
- the controls of the charge readout using the VIS gate 1608 and the TOF gate 1606 , 1612 , 1614 , and 1616 are similar to the photodiodes 400 as described in reference to FIG. 4A , or the photodiodes 450 as described in reference to FIG. 4B , or the photodiodes 500 as described in reference to FIG. 5 , or the photodiodes 600 as described in reference to FIG. 6 .
- the controls of the charge readout using the TOF gates 1606 , 1612 , 1614 , and 1616 are similar to the multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference to FIG. 7 , the multi-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference to FIG.
- the readout circuits coupled to the TOF gates 1606 , 1612 , 1614 , and 1616 would collect the same type of carriers, and the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1608 may or may not collect the same type of carriers.
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1608 may be configured to collect holes or electrons depending on the design because the NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and the VIS pixel 1604 are isolated.
- the readout circuit coupled to the VIS gate 1608 may be configured to collect holes or electrons.
- FIGS. 17A-17D illustrate an example design 1700 for fabricating a photodiode array.
- a germanium-silicon layer 1702 was formed on a donor wafer 1704 .
- the donor wafer 1704 may be a silicon wafer.
- the germanium-silicon layer 1702 may be formed using epitaxial growth through chemical vapor deposition (CVD) system.
- CVD chemical vapor deposition
- the isolation structures 1708 are formed in the germanium-silicon layer 1702 to define the photodiode regions.
- the isolation structures 1708 may be formed through dry-etch of the isolation structure patterns followed by a deposition of insulating materials such as oxide, or by implantations to form a doping junction, or any other suitable techniques.
- insulating materials such as oxide
- An interconnect layer 1706 is then formed on the germanium-silicon layer 1702 , where multiple interconnects are formed in a dielectric layer to establish electrical connections with the germanium-silicon layer 1702 , and where alignment marks for bonding alignment are formed.
- an interconnect layer 1716 of a carrier substrate 1714 is bonded with the interconnect layer 1706 of the donor wafer 1704 .
- the interconnect layer referred herein may include conductive electrical path (e.g. metallic layer) and dielectric layer to isolate individual conductive electrical path.
- the carrier substrate 1714 may be a silicon substrate, where one or more layers 1718 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate.
- the circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array. Alignment marks may be formed in both the layers 1706 and 1716 by any suitable techniques.
- the bonding between the layers 1706 and 1716 may be done by any suitable techniques such as thermal bonding or hybrid bonding including metal-metal bonding and oxide-oxide bonding.
- a filter layer 1720 and a lens layer 1722 are formed on the germanium-silicon layer 1702 to form the photodiode array.
- the donor wafer 1704 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming the filter layer 1720 .
- germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related to FIGS. 17A-17D .
- FIGS. 18A-18D illustrate an example design 1800 for selectively forming germanium-silicon on a substrate.
- the design 1800 may be used to fabricate the photodiode array 100 , 200 , or 300 , for example.
- a recess 1804 is formed on a substrate 1802 .
- the recess 1804 may define the photodiode area for an NIR pixel.
- the recess may be formed using lithography followed by a dry etching of the substrate 1802 .
- the shape of the recess may correspond to the shape of the pixel, such as a square, a circle, or other suitable shapes.
- a dielectric layer may be deposited over the substrate, and a directional etch may be performed to form a sidewall spacer 1806 .
- the directional etch may be an anisotropic dry etch.
- a germanium-silicon region 1808 is selectively grown from the substrate 1802 .
- the germanium-silicon region 1808 may be formed using epitaxial growth through chemical vapor deposition (CVD) system.
- the germanium-silicon region 1808 is planarized with the substrate 1802 .
- the germanium-silicon region 1808 may be planarized using chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) or any other suitable techniques.
- CMP chemical mechanical polishing
- germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related to FIGS. 18A-18D .
- the sidewall spacers 1806 may be omitted.
- FIGS. 19A-19D illustrate an example design 1900 for fabricating a photodiode array.
- the design 1900 may be used to fabricate the photodiodes 400 , 450 , 500 , 600 , 700 , 800 , 900 , 910 , 920 , 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , 1162 , and 1200 as described respectively in reference to FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10B-10D, 11A-11H, and 12 , for example. Referring to FIG.
- silicon photodiodes 1902 are formed on a donor wafer 1904 , and a germanium-silicon photodiode 1906 was selectively grown on the donor wafer 1904 .
- the visible pixel 454 may be an example of a diode of the silicon photodiodes 1902
- the NIR pixel 452 may be an example of a diode of the GeSi photodiodes 1906 .
- the selective growth of germanium-silicon photodiode may be done using the design 1800 as described in reference to FIG. 18A-18D or any other suitable designs or processes.
- an interconnect layer 1910 is formed on the germanium-silicon photodiode 1906 , where multiple interconnects are formed in a dielectric layer to establish electrical connections with the germanium-silicon photodiode 1906 and the silicon photodiodes 1902 , and where alignment marks for bonding alignment are formed.
- an interconnect layer 1916 of a carrier substrate 1914 is bonded with the interconnect layer 1910 of the donor wafer 1904 .
- the carrier substrate 1914 may be a silicon substrate, where one or more layers 1918 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate.
- the circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array. Alignment marks may be formed in both the layers 1910 and 1916 by any suitable techniques.
- the bonding between the layers 1910 and 1916 may be done by any suitable techniques such as thermal bonding or hybrid bonding including metal-metal bonding and oxide-oxide bonding.
- a filter layer 1920 and a lens layer 1922 are formed on the silicon photodiode 1902 to form the photodiode array.
- the donor wafer 1904 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming the filter layer 1920 .
- germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related to FIGS. 19A-19D .
- FIGS. 20A-20E illustrate an example design 2000 for fabricating a photodiode array.
- the design 2000 may be used to fabricate the photodiodes 400 , 450 , 500 , 600 , 700 , 800 , 900 , 910 , 920 , 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , 1162 , and 1200 as respectively described in reference to FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10B-10D, 11A-11H, and 12 , for example.
- a germanium-silicon layer 2002 was formed on a first donor wafer 2004 .
- a first interconnect layer 2006 is formed on the germanium-silicon layer 2002 with multiple interconnects and alignment marks.
- an interconnect layer 2016 of a carrier substrate 2014 is bonded with the interconnect layer 2006 of the first donor wafer 2004 .
- the carrier substrate 2014 may be a silicon substrate, where one or more layers 2018 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate.
- the circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array.
- the bonding between the layers 2006 and 2016 may be done by any suitable techniques such as thermal bonding or hybrid bonding including metal-metal bonding and oxide-oxide bonding.
- the first donor wafer 2004 is removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding.
- a first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020 is formed.
- the first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020 may be formed using a pattern and an etch of the germanium-silicon layer 2002 , followed by a deposition of a passivation layer such as a dielectric layer.
- the dielectric layer may be planarized through CMP or other suitable techniques.
- a via 2022 may be formed by an anisotropic etch followed by a deposition of conductive materials such as copper.
- the dielectric layer 2044 of the carrier substrate 2014 is bonded with an interconnect layer 2032 of a second donor wafer 2034 .
- a germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036 are formed on the second donor wafer 2034 .
- the via 2038 is bonded with the via 2022 to establish electrical connections between the first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020 , the germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036 , and the integrated circuits 2018 .
- a filter layer 2040 and a lens layer 2042 are formed on the germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036 to form the photodiode array.
- the second donor wafer 2034 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming the filter layer 2040 .
- germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related to FIGS. 20A-20F .
- Operation speed or bandwidth of a photodetector can be an important performance parameter for applications that benefit from high speed detection of light, such as TOF detection.
- bandwidth of a photodetector is the physical size of the photodetector, such as the area of the photodetector through which light is received. Reducing the area of the photodetector, for example, can lead to a reduction in device capacitance, carrier transit time, or a combination of both, which typically results in an increase in photodetector bandwidth.
- a reduction in the detection area of a photodetector can lead to a reduction in the amount of light (i.e., number of photons) detected by the photodetector. For example, for a given intensity of light per unit area, the reduction in the area of the detector leads to a reduction in detected light.
- microlens can focus the incident light onto the photodetector, allowing a small-area photodetector to detect light incident over an area larger than itself.
- a properly designed combination of a microlens and a spacer layer (SL) that separates the microlens from the photodetector by an effective focal length of the microlens can allow focusing of the incident light to a diffraction-limited spot that is on the order of the square of the optical wavelength of the incident light.
- SL spacer layer
- FIG. 21A shows a cross-sectional view of an example configuration 2100 of silicon lenses integrated with photodetectors.
- the configuration 2100 includes a donor wafer 2110 and a carrier wafer 2130 .
- the donor wafer 2110 includes multiple pixels 2120 a through 2120 c (collectively referred to as pixels 2120 ), via 2114 , metal pad 2116 , and a first bonding layer 2112 .
- the carrier wafer 2130 includes a second bonding layer 2132 .
- the donor wafer 2110 and the carrier wafer 2130 are bonded to each other through the first bonding layer 2112 and the second bonding layer 2132 .
- the substrate 2110 may be similar to substrate 102 of FIG. 1 .
- the absorption region 2106 may be similar to the absorption regions 706 , 806 , and 906 .
- the pixels 2120 a through 2120 c include absorption regions 2106 a through 2106 c , respectively, and microlenses 2122 a through 2122 c (collected referred to as microlenses 2122 ), respectively.
- the microlenses 2122 are convex lenses that are integrated into or on the donor wafer 2110 . In applications that benefit from high light collection efficiency, such as TOF detection, addition of microlenses 2122 may be beneficial.
- the convex configuration of the microlens 2122 can cause light incident on the microlens 2122 to be focused toward the absorption region 2106 , which may improve light collection efficiency of the pixels 2120 , leading to improved pixel performance.
- the arrangement of the pixel 2120 with the microlens 2122 on a backside of the donor wafer 2110 may be referred to as backside illumination.
- the microlens 2122 has various characteristics that affect its performance, including geometrical parameters and material from which it is formed.
- the microlens 2122 is typically implemented in a plano-convex configuration, with one surface facing the incident light and being convex with a radius of curvature, and the other surface being a planar surface interfacing with the donor wafer 2110 in or on which the microlens 2122 is formed.
- the plano-convex configuration of the microlens 2122 may lend itself to fabrication through standard semiconductor processing techniques.
- the microlens 2122 may have a height H L and a diameter D L , and may be separated from a lens-facing surface of the absorption region 2106 by a height H O .
- H L may range from 1 to 4 ⁇ m
- H O may range from 8 to 12 ⁇ m
- H A may range from 1 to 1.5 ⁇ m
- DL may range from 5 to 15 ⁇ m.
- its radius of curvature may be set such that the focal length of the microlens 2122 is approximately equal to HO to achieve optimal focusing of light onto the absorption region 2106 .
- the determination of the focal length and the radius of curvature may be performed using various simulation techniques such as beam propagation method (BPM) and finite difference time domain (FDTD) technique.
- the microlens 2122 is an aspheric lens.
- the microlens 2122 can be formed from various materials and fabricated in various ways. In general, various materials that are transparent for the wavelengths to be detected by the pixels 2120 may be used.
- the microlens 2122 may be fabricated from materials having moderate to high index of refraction (e.g., >1.5), such as crystalline silicon, polysilicon, amorphous silicon, silicon nitride, polymer, or combination thereof.
- moderate to high index of refraction e.g., >1.5
- crystalline silicon crystalline silicon
- polysilicon e.g., crystalline silicon, polysilicon, amorphous silicon, silicon nitride, polymer, or combination thereof.
- polymer materials may be used.
- silicon may be used as silicon is relatively transparent in the NIR, and has a relatively high index of refraction (approximately 3.5 at 1000 nm), making it well suited as a lens material in the NIR.
- a silicon microlens may block a substantial portion of visible light from reaching the absorption region 2106 , which may be beneficial for applications where selective detection of NIR wavelengths is desired (e.g., ToF detection).
- a crystalline silicon microlens 2122 may be fabricated by patterning and etching a surface of the donor wafer 2110 , which is typically a crystalline silicon wafer.
- polysilicon or amorphous silicon may be deposited on the surface of the donor wafer 2110 , which may then be patterned and etched in similar fashion.
- microlens 2122 through etching of the crystalline silicon donor wafer 2110 or by etching of the polysilicon or amorphous silicon deposited on the donor wafer 2110 is an example method of integrally forming the microlens 2122 on the donor wafer 2110 .
- the patterning of the microlens 2122 may be performed using, for example, grayscale lithography techniques.
- grayscale lithography a feature to be patterned, such as the microlens, is exposed using a local gradation in the exposure dose, which translates into a gradation in the thickness of the resulting photoresist mask that has been developed.
- the photoresist mask can be patterned to have a similar shape as the microlens 2122 .
- the photoresist mask is then transferred onto the material underneath, such as the crystalline silicon donor wafer 2110 , by semiconductor etching techniques such as plasma-based directional etching techniques, completing the fabrication of the microlens 2122 .
- the local gradation in the exposure dose may be achieved, for example, by varying a fill-factor of sub-wavelength features on a photomask
- the absorption regions 2106 may be similar to absorption region 706 , 806 , and 906 .
- the carrier wafer 2130 may include various electronic circuits that are coupled to the pixels 2120 .
- the electronic circuits may be coupled through structures such as the via 2114 .
- the via 2114 may be coupled to a metal pad 2116 to interface with external electronics through, for example, a wire bond.
- the carrier wafer 2130 and the donor wafer 2110 may be bonded or mechanically attached to one another through various techniques.
- the first and second bonding layers 2112 and 2132 may be oxides (e.g., silicon dioxide), and the bonding may be an oxide-to-oxide bonding.
- the first and second bonding layers 2112 and 2132 may be metals (e.g., copper), and the bonding may be a metal-to-metal bonding.
- the first and second bonding layers 2112 and 2132 may be a combination of oxide and metals (e.g., silicon dioxide and copper), and the bonding may be a hybrid bonding.
- FIG. 21B shows a cross-sectional view of an example configuration 2140 of a microlens integrated with a photodetector.
- the configuration 2140 includes a microlens 2142 , an anti-reflection coating (ARC) layer 2144 , a spacer layer 2146 , a first layer 2148 , a second layer 2150 , a silicon layer 2152 and a photodetector 2154 .
- the ARC layer 2144 is supported by the microlens 2142 .
- the microlens 2142 is supported by the spacer layer 2146 .
- the photodetector 2154 may be supported by the silicon layer 2152 or be formed within the silicon layer 2152 .
- the first layer 2148 and the second layer 2150 may be intermediate layers between the silicon layer 2152 and the spacer layer 2146 .
- the ARC layer 2144 is provided to reduce a reflection of light incident on the microlens 2142 .
- the ARC layer 2144 may be designed to have a refractive index that is the square root of the index of the microlens 2142 , and have a thickness corresponding to a quarter of the incident wavelength.
- the ARC layer 2144 may be formed from silicon dioxide.
- the ARC layer 2144 may include multiple layers to form a multi-layer ARC.
- the configuration 2140 may correspond to an integration of microlens 2142 in a back-side illuminated (BSI) image sensor configuration.
- the silicon layer 2152 can be a silicon substrate, such as the donor wafer 1904 of FIG. 19C or the second donor wafer 2034 of FIG. 20E
- the photodetector 2154 may be, for example, the photodetectors 1902 or 1906 of FIGS. 19A-19D .
- the interface between the silicon layer 2152 and the second layer 2150 may correspond to the bottom surface of the donor wafer 1904 opposite to the photodetector 1906 of FIGS. 19A-19D .
- the second layer 2150 formed on the silicon layer 2152 can include various structures and layers typical in fabrication of a BSI illuminated sensor wafer.
- structures and layers include an ARC layer for reducing light reflection at the interface of the silicon layer 2152 , and a metal grid, such as a tungsten grid, for blocking light into the silicon layer 2152 other than regions for receiving light, such as the regions underneath the microlens 2142 .
- the first layer 2148 may be a thin layer of material that promotes adhesion of the spacer layer 2146 to the second layer 2150 for improving, among others, manufacturability and reliability of the configuration 2140 .
- the material for the first layer 2148 may be, for example, various dielectric materials (e.g., SiO 2 , SiON, and SiN) or polymers. In some implementation, the first layer 2148 can be omitted depending on the interaction between the second layer 2150 and the spacer layer 2146 (e.g., in the case where the spacer layer 2146 has good adhesion with the second layer 2150 ).
- the configuration 2140 may be fabricated by providing a sensor wafer including the silicon layer 2152 , the photodetector 2154 , and the second layer 2150 , and depositing the first layer 2148 , the spacer layer 2146 , the microlens 2142 , and the ARC layer 2144 in the order given, and then patterning and etching to expose metal pads similar to the metal pad 2116 shown in FIG. 21A .
- the microlens 2142 may be patterned and etched using techniques described in relation to fabrication of the microlens 2122 of FIG. 21A .
- the ARC layer 2144 is shown to be limited to the surface of the microlens 2142 , in general, the ARC layer 2144 may extend to other surfaces, such as the side surface of the microlens 2142 and the upper surface of the spacer layer 2146 .
- the microlens 2142 has a refractive index of 1.53, a radius of curvature of 6 ⁇ m, a height of 4 ⁇ m, and a diameter D L of 10 ⁇ m.
- the ARC layer 2144 is formed from SiO 2 , which has a refractive index of 1.46 at 940 nm and a thickness of 161 nm.
- the spacer layer 2146 has a refractive index of 1.56, and a thickness of 2 ⁇ m.
- the first layer 2148 has a refractive index 1.54 and a thickness of 8 ⁇ m.
- the second layer 2150 includes an ARC layer for the silicon layer 2152 and a tungsten grid. While specific characteristics have been provided, the characteristics may be modified to adapt the configuration 2140 , for example, for different operational wavelengths, materials, and size of the photodetector 2154 .
- the second layer 2150 which may be referred to as the “top layer” formed on top of the backside of a silicon substrate of a BSI image sensor, may be modified to improve the overall optical performance of configuration 2140 .
- the second layer 2150 typically includes metal grid embedded in a dielectric layer, such as tungsten grid embedded in a layer of SiO 2 . This layer of SiO 2 may serve as an ARC layer if the light was entering the silicon layer 2152 directly from air.
- the SiO 2 layer may not function effectively in reducing the optical reflection at the interfaces between the silicon layer 2152 and the stacking of the first layer 2148 and spacer layer 2146 .
- Table 1 shows simulation parameters and calculated transmission of an implementation of configuration 2140 .
- the layers and the thicknesses have been adapted and/or approximated for the purpose of performing a simulation that approximate the expected transmission of different implementations of the configuration 2140 .
- case 1 corresponds to a second layer 2150 that includes a standard single layer of SiO 2 , which results in a simulated transmission of approximately 79%.
- a second layer 2150 that includes a standard single layer of SiO 2 , which results in a simulated transmission of approximately 79%.
- Such a drop in transmission can be mitigated by including a Si 3 N 4 layer in the second layer 2150 under the SiO 2 layer as an intermediate layer between the SiO 2 layer and the silicon layer 2152 .
- the intermediate layer may be referred to as an anti-reflection layer.
- various optically transparent material with a refractive index greater than SiO 2 may be used in place of Si 3 N 4 .
- Example materials include SiON, SiN, Al 2 O 3 , HfO 2 , ZrO 2 , and La 2 O 3 , and high-k materials (e.g., materials with high dielectric constant) that are compatible with CMOS manufacturing processes.
- Suitable material may have a refractive index greater than, for example, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, or 2.0. Thickness of the material should be adapted to be an odd multiple of a quarter of the wavelength of light within the material.
- Si 3 N 4 or high-k material layer directly on top of the silicon layer 2152 may result in an increase of a dark current of the photodetector 2154 due to, for example, increased surface defect at the Silicon-Si 3 N 4 or the Silicon-high-k material interface relative to Silicon-SiO 2 interface.
- a second layer of SiO 2 can be inserted between the Si 3 N 4 layer and the silicon layer 2152 . Inserting the second layer of SiO 2 of thickness ranging from 10 nm to 50 nm results in a transmission ranging from approximately 97.1% to 85%, respectively. As such, inserting a thin layer of SiO 2 , such as 10 nm, may be beneficial for mitigating the increase in dark current while maintaining high optical transmission.
- FIG. 22A shows an example imaging system 2200 for determining characteristics of a target object 2210 .
- the target object 2210 may be a three-dimensional object.
- the imaging system 2200 may include a transmitter unit 2202 , a receiver unit 2204 , and a processing unit 2206 .
- the transmitter unit 2202 emits light 2212 towards the target object 2210 .
- the transmitter unit 2202 may include one or more light sources, control circuitry, and/or optical elements.
- the transmitter unit 2202 may include one or more NIR or visible LEDs, where the emitted light 2212 may be collimated by a collimating lens to propagate in free space.
- the receiver unit 2204 receives the reflected light 2214 that is reflected from the target object 2210 .
- the receiver unit 2204 may include one or more photodiodes, control circuitry, and/or optical elements.
- the receiver unit 2204 may include an image sensor, where the image sensor includes multiple pixels fabricated on a semiconductor substrate. Each pixel may include one or more multi-gate photodiodes for detecting the reflected light 2214 , where the reflected light 2214 may be focused to the photodiodes.
- Each photodiode may be the multi-gate photodiode disclosed in this patent application.
- the processing unit 2206 processes the photo-carriers generated by the receiver unit 2204 and determines characteristics of the target object 2210 .
- the processing unit 2206 may include control circuitry, one or more processors, and/or computer storage medium that may store instructions for determining the characteristics of the target object 2210 .
- the processing unit 2206 may include readout circuits and processors that can process information associated with the collected photo-carriers to determine the characteristics of the target object 2210 .
- the characteristics of the target object 2210 may be depth information of the target object 2210 .
- the characteristics of the target object 2210 may be material compositions of the target object 2210 .
- FIG. 22B shows one example technique for determining characteristics of the target object 2210 .
- the transmitter unit 2202 may emit light pulses 2212 modulated at a frequency f m with a duty cycle of 50% as an example.
- the receiver unit 2204 may receive reflected light pulses 2214 having a phase shift of ⁇ .
- the multi-gate photodiodes are controlled such that a readout circuit 1 reads the collected charges Q 1 in a phase synchronized with the emitted light pulses, and a readout circuit 2 reads the collected charges Q 2 in an opposite phase with the emitted light pulses.
- the distance, D, between the imaging system 2200 and the target object 2210 may be derived using the equation
- FIG. 22C shows another example technique for determining characteristics of the target object 2210 .
- the transmitter unit 2202 may emit light pulses 2212 modulated at a frequency f m with a duty cycle of less than 50%.
- the signal-to-noise ratio of the received reflected light pulses 2214 may be improved while maintaining substantially the same power consumption for the imaging system 2200 . This is made possible when the device bandwidth is increased so that the duty cycle of the optical pulses can be decreased without distorting the pulse shape.
- the receiver unit 2204 may receive reflected light pulses 2214 having a phase shift of ⁇ .
- the multi-gate photodiodes are controlled such that a readout circuit 1 reads the collected charges Q 1 ′ in a phase synchronized with the emitted light pulses, and a readout circuit 2 reads the collected charges Q 2 ′ in a delayed phase with the emitted light pulses.
- the distance, D, between the imaging system 2200 and the target object 2210 may be derived using the equation
- FIG. 23 shows an example of a flow diagram 2300 for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system.
- the process 2300 may be performed by a system such as the imaging system 2200 .
- the system receives reflected light ( 2302 ).
- the transmitter unit 2202 may emit NIR light pulses 2212 towards the target object 2210 .
- the receiver unit 2204 may receive the reflected NIR light pulses 2214 that is reflected from the target object 2210 .
- the system determines phase information ( 2304 ).
- the receiver unit 2204 may include an image sensor, where the image sensor includes multiple pixels fabricated on a semiconductor substrate. Each pixel may include one or more photodiodes for detecting the reflected light pulses 2214 .
- the type of photodiodes may be the multi-gate photodiodes disclosed in this patent application, where the phase information may be determined using techniques described in reference to FIG. 22B or FIG. 22C .
- the system determines object characteristics ( 2306 ).
- the processing unit 2206 may determine depth information of the object 2210 based on the phase information using techniques described in reference to FIG. 22B or FIG. 22C .
- An important performance metric of a photodiode is its dark current, which is a current that flows in absence of an optical signal and ambience light.
- signal to noise ratio (SNR) of optical measurements made through photodiodes are negatively influenced by the presence of the dark current.
- SNR of an optical measurement through a photodiode is proportional to an integration time of the measurement (e.g., proportional to a square root of the integration time).
- the dark current of a photodiode is typically an exponential function of the reverse bias voltage established across the cathode and anode of the photodiode. As such, reducing the reverse bias voltage in a controlled manner while retaining the overall operation of the photodiode, such as the integration time of the measurement, may lead to improved SNR performance of the photodiode.
- FIG. 24A shows a schematic diagram of a circuit 2400 for operating a multi-gate photodiode.
- the circuit 2400 includes a first readout circuit 2410 , a second readout circuit 2430 , a first MOSFET transistor 2412 , a second MOSFET transistor 2432 , a current steering circuit 2450 , and a photodiode 2480 .
- the first MOSFET transistor 2412 is coupled to the first readout circuit 2410 and the current steering circuit 2450 .
- the second MOSFET transistor 2432 is coupled to the second readout circuit 2430 and the current steering circuit 2450 .
- the first readout circuit 2410 includes a first reset MOSFET transistor 2420 , a first capacitor 2422 coupled to the first reset MOSFET transistor 2420 , and a first source follower circuit 2460 .
- An input terminal of the first source follower circuit is coupled to the first capacitor 2422 .
- the second readout circuit 2430 includes a second reset MOSFET transistor 2440 , a second capacitor 2442 coupled to the second reset MOSFET transistor 2440 , and a second source follower circuit 2470 .
- An input terminal of the second source follower circuit is coupled to the second capacitor 2442 .
- the first and second source follower circuits 2460 and 2470 are configured to output voltages that corresponds to the voltages supplied at the input terminals of the source follower circuits 2460 and 2470 .
- the current steering circuit 2450 includes a first current steering MOSFET transistor 2452 and a second current steering MOSFET transistor 2454 .
- a third control voltage source 2456 is coupled to a gate terminal of the first current steering MOSFET transistor 2452
- a fourth control voltage source 2458 is coupled to a gate terminal of the second current steering MOSFET transistor 2454 .
- the current steering circuit 2450 operates by directing the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode 2480 through the first current steering MOSFET 2452 , the second current steering MOSFET 2454 , or a combination thereof, based on the control voltages generated by the first and second control voltage sources 2456 and 2458 .
- the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode 2480 may be directed to flow through the first current steering MOSFET 2452 , and vice versa.
- the operation of the first and second current steering MOSFET transistors 2452 and 2454 may be similar to the operation of the various gates described previously, such as the gates 416 , 426 , 516 , 526 , 708 , 710 , 808 , and 810 .
- the current steering circuit 2450 and the photodiode 2480 in combination forms a multi-gate photodiode 2482 .
- the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be analogous to the multi-gate photodiode 700 of FIG. 7 , the multi-gate photodiode 800 of FIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , and 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the vertical PIN diode formed by the p+ GeSi region 731 , the absorption layer 706 , and the n-well region 704 may form the photodiode 2480 .
- the first gate 708 , the first n+ Si region 712 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the first current steering MOSFET transistor 2452
- the second gate 710 , the second n+ Si region 714 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the second current steering MOSFET transistor 2454 .
- the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be replaced by the switched photodetector described in U.S.
- Each of the MOSFET transistors 2412 , 2420 , 2432 , 2440 , 2452 , and 2454 includes a source terminal, a drain terminal, and a gate terminal.
- the source terminal and the drain terminal may be identical in the underlying structure, but distinguished based on the direction of flow of the current through the transistors. For example, for an N-type MOSFET (“NMOS transistor”) having a P-type channel region, the current may flow from the drain terminal to the source terminal through the channel region, whereas for a P-type MOSFET (“PMOS transistor”) having an N-type channel region, the current may flow from the source terminal to the drain terminal through the channel region.
- NMOS transistor N-type MOSFET
- PMOS transistor P-type MOSFET
- the source and drain terminals may be referred to as a first channel terminal and a second channel terminal when describing the connectivity between the MOSFETs and other circuit elements.
- the gate terminal controls the flow of current through the source and the drain terminals.
- a control voltage larger than a threshold voltage Vth may allow current to flow through the source and drain terminals.
- Such mode of operation of the MOSFET transistors may be referred to as operating in a saturation region or a triode region of operation, depending on voltages of the source and drain terminals relative to the gate terminal.
- the saturation region the current flowing through the source and drain terminals is not strongly affected by changes in the difference between the source and drain voltages (i.e., output impedance of the transistor is high).
- the triode region the current flowing through the source and drain terminals is approximately linearly proportional to the difference between the source and drain voltages (i.e., the transistor operates similarly to a resistor).
- a control voltage smaller than the threshold voltage may reduce the flow of current through the source and drain terminals.
- the flow of current may be reduced exponentially as the control voltage is reduced below the threshold voltage.
- Such mode of operation of the MOSFET transistors may be referred to as operating in a subthreshold region of operation.
- the circuit 2400 is implemented using N-type MOSFET transistors.
- the drain terminal of the first reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to a first supply node 2408
- the source terminal of the first reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to the first capacitor 2422 .
- the first capacitor 2422 is coupled to the input terminal of the first source follower circuit 2460 .
- the source terminal of the first reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to the drain terminal of the first MOSFET 2412
- the source terminal of the first MOSFET 2412 is coupled to the drain terminal of the first current steering MOSFET 2452 .
- a flow of current into and out of the first capacitor 2422 may be controlled through operations of various MOSFETs coupled to the first capacitor 2422 .
- the drain terminal of the second reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to the first supply node 2408
- the source terminal of the second reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to the second capacitor 2442 .
- the second capacitor 2442 is coupled to an input terminal of the second source follower circuit 2470 .
- the source terminal of the second reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to the drain terminal of the second MOSFET 2432
- the source terminal of the second MOSFET 2432 is coupled to the drain terminal of the second current steering MOSFET 2454 .
- a flow of current into and out of the second capacitor 2442 may be controlled through operations of various MOSFETs coupled to the second capacitor 2442 .
- the first supply node 2408 supplies a first supply voltage to the first and the second reset MOSFET transistors 2420 and 2440 .
- a second supply node 2402 supplies a second supply voltage to the first and the second source follower circuits 2460 and 2470 .
- One or more supply voltage sources may provide suitable first and second supply voltages to the first and second supply nodes 2408 and 2402 , which may depend on various factors including specific process node, circuit design, characteristics of the photodiode 2480 , reset voltage of the first and second capacitors 2422 and 2442 , and charge-to-voltage conversion gain.
- the first supply node 2408 may be referred to as a V U node, and the first supply voltage of the V U node may be a user-defined voltage generated by, for example, an on-chip integrated circuit block.
- the second supply node 2402 may be referred to as a V E node, and the second supply voltage of the V E node may be an externally-defined voltage generated by, for example, an off-chip power supply.
- the first capacitor 2422 and the second capacitor 2442 are charged to a preset voltage through the first and second reset MOSFET transistors 2420 and 2440 .
- a second control voltage 2406 V c2
- a second control voltage source 2407 coupled to the gate terminals of the first and second reset MOSFET transistors 2420 and 2440 can be used to apply the second control voltage 2406 .
- the second control voltage 2406 may be controlled to vary the preset voltage to which the capacitors 2422 and 2442 are charged (e.g., set to the supply voltage or a fraction of the supply voltage). Once the charging of the capacitors 2422 and 2442 is complete, the second control voltage 2406 may be set (e.g., to 0 V) to turn off the first and second reset MOSFET transistors 2420 and 2440 , which decouples the capacitors 2422 and 2442 from the first supply node 2408 .
- This charging operation may be referred to as a reset operation of the circuit 2400 .
- the reset operation may be a step within the readout step of the multi-gate photodiode 2482 .
- the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 may be controlled to initiate and terminate the integration by generating, through a first control voltage source 2405 coupled to the gate terminals of the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , a first control voltage 2404 (V c1 ).
- the first control voltage 2404 may be set through the control voltage source 2405 to operate the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 in the triode regions.
- the photocurrent generated by the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may flow through the drain and source terminals of the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 and through the current steering circuit 2450 of the multi-gate photodiodes 2482 .
- Such flow of the photocurrent through the current steering circuit 2450 may be integrated at the capacitors 2422 and 2442 by discharging the capacitors 2422 and 2442 that have been charged to the preset voltage during the reset operation.
- Operation of the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 in the triode region is analogous to coupling the first and second capacitors 2422 and 2442 to respective drain terminals of the first and second current steering MOSFET transistors 2452 and 2454 through respective resistors (“effective resistors”) put in place of the first and the second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 .
- the resistances of such effective resistors are typically of modest values (e.g., 10 ohms to 10,000 ohms) that do not present significant voltage drops in response to current flowing through the photodiode 2480 .
- the photodiode current which may be a combination of photocurrent and dark current, is typically a small current (e.g., ranging from pA to ⁇ A), and the resulting voltage drops across the resistors are relatively small as well (e.g., ranging from nV to mV).
- the voltages at the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFET transistors 2452 and 2454 are similar to the voltages of the capacitors 2422 and 2442 within a small voltage drop.
- the capacitors 2422 and 2442 have been charged to a preset voltage that may approach the first supply voltage of the first supply node 2408 , and the current steering MOSFET transistors 2452 and 2454 may pass on the voltage at their drain terminals to the photodiode 2480 coupled to their source terminals when one or both of the current steering MOSFET transistors are turned on.
- the photodiode 2480 may experience a voltage similar to the preset voltage to which the capacitors 2422 and 2442 have been charged, resulting in a reverse bias across the junctions of the photodiode 2480 that may be larger than the minimum reverse bias needed for proper operation of the photodiode 2480 .
- Such excessive reverse bias results in increased dark current, which may reduce the SNR of the output generated by the circuit 2400 .
- Photodiodes of various design and material composition may benefit from controlling of the reverse bias voltage.
- germanium maybe more susceptible to dark current generation relative to silicon due to a higher material defect density that is typically associated with germanium absorption region grown on silicon substrate.
- germanium-based multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be well suited to benefit from the controlling of the reverse bias voltage through the first control voltage 2404 and the resulting reduction in the dark current.
- the reverse bias established across the junction of the photodiode 2480 may be reduced by decoupling the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFET transistors 2452 and 2454 from the respective capacitors 2422 and 2442 during the integration time. Such decoupling may be achieved by operating the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 in the saturation region or the subthreshold region. Operation in the saturation region or the subthreshold region allow the photocurrent generated by the photodiode 2480 to flow through the current steering circuit 2450 and the drain and source terminals of the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 .
- the effective resistances, or the output impedances, of the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 operating in saturation or subthreshold regions are significantly higher than output impedances of the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 operating in the triode region.
- High output impedance decouples the capacitors 2422 and 2442 from the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 , which allows the voltages of the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 to be different from (e.g., significantly lower than) the voltages of the capacitors 2422 and 2442 .
- the voltages at the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 are determined at least in part by the first control voltage 2404 and the threshold voltages of the first and the second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 operating in the saturation or subthreshold regions.
- the threshold voltages may be determined by the design and structural parameters of the MOSFETs such as channel doping concentration and gate oxide thickness, and may range, for example, from 0.1 V to 1V.
- Lowering the first control voltage 2404 reduces the voltages at the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 , which in turn reduces the reverse bias across the junction of the photodiode 2480 .
- the dark current of the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be reduced, and SNR of the output generated by the circuit 2400 may be improved.
- the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 may be controlled to operate in the saturation region or the subthreshold region by controlling, through the first control voltage source 2405 , the first control voltage 2404 .
- MOSFETs can be operated in the saturation region by setting the voltage difference between the gate terminal and the source terminal (V GS ) to be greater than the threshold voltage (VTH) while maintaining the voltage difference between the drain terminal and the source terminal (V DS ) to be greater than V GS ⁇ V TH .
- MOSFETs can be operated in the subthreshold region by setting the voltage difference between the gate terminal and the source terminal (V GS ) to be smaller than the threshold voltage V TH .
- the first control voltage 2404 may be varied to control the voltage difference between the capacitors 2422 and 2442 and the drain terminals of the respective current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 . In some implementations, the first control voltage 2404 may be increased to reduce the voltage difference, and vice versa. In some implementations, the first control voltage 2404 may control the voltage difference between the capacitors 2422 and 2442 and the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 to be equal to or greater than 10%, 30%, or 50% of the first supply voltage of the first supply node 2408 . In some implementations, the first control voltage 2404 may control the voltages of the drain terminals of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 to be at least 100 mV smaller than the voltages of the capacitors 2422 and 2442 .
- the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 When the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 are operated in either the saturation region or the subthreshold region, the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 may be operating as current buffers that decouples the source voltages from the drain voltages.
- the first control voltage 2404 may be set (e.g., to 0 V) to turn off the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , which stops the photocurrent from flowing through the respective MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , stopping the integration.
- the preset integration time may be a variable integration time.
- the initiation and termination of the integration may be referred to as shutter operation, and the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 may be referred to as shutter MOSFETs.
- the capacitors 2422 and 2442 hold output voltages that is inversely proportional to the photocurrent that flowed through the respective current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 over the integration period.
- the output voltages may be buffered for further processing by the source follower circuits 2460 and 2470 .
- the current steering circuit 2450 may be operated in various ways to implement various operation modes of the circuit 2400 .
- Operation modes of the circuit 2400 includes a time-of-flight (TOF) imaging mode, a first intensity imaging mode, and a second intensity imaging mode.
- the operation modes of the circuit 2400 may be controlled, for example, by the processing unit 2206 , or a control unit of the imaging system 2200 .
- the circuit 2400 may be operated in the TOF imaging mode by steering the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode 2480 to the first readout circuit 2410 for a first period, and steering the photo-generated carriers to the second readout circuit 2430 for a second period.
- the steering may be performed by controlling the third voltage source 2456 to apply the third control voltage 2455 greater than the threshold voltage of the MOSFET 2452 while simultaneously controlling the fourth voltage source 2458 to apply the fourth control voltage 2457 of 0 V for the first period of time, then controlling the fourth voltage source 2458 to apply the fourth control voltage 2455 greater than the threshold voltage of the MOSFET 2454 while simultaneously controlling the third voltage source 2456 to apply the third control voltage 2455 of 0 V for the second period of time.
- the circuit 2400 may be operated in the first intensity imaging mode by controlling the third voltage source 2456 and the fourth voltage source 2458 in a synchronous manner, such that the third and fourth control voltages 2455 and 2457 are substantially equal to each other at a given time.
- Such synchronous control of the third and fourth voltage sources 2456 and 2458 leads to the first and second current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 being simultaneously turned on or off.
- the photo-generated carriers may flow to both capacitors 2422 and 2442 , and the voltages of both capacitors may be read-out and processed to determine the amount of light the photodiode 2480 has received during an integration time period, which corresponds to an intensity of light received during the integration time period.
- the first intensity imaging mode may not require a modulation of the transmitter unit 2202 and a demodulation of the receiver unit 2206 shown in FIG. 22A .
- the circuit 2400 may be operated in the second intensity imaging mode by controlling one of the third and fourth voltage sources 2456 and 2458 to begin and end the integration of the photo-generated carriers while maintaining the other of the third and fourth voltage sources 2456 and 2458 to generate a fixed control voltage of 0 V.
- the fourth voltage source 2458 controls the fourth voltage source 2458 to output a fixed control voltage of 0 V, the second current steering MOSFET 2454 is shut off, and photo-generated carriers do not flow to the second capacitor 2442 .
- the output of the second readout circuit 2430 is not used, and the photo-generated carriers are integrated only at the first capacitor 2422 through control of the third voltage source 2456 .
- the voltage of the first capacitor 2422 may be read-out and processed to determine the amount of light the photodiode 2480 has received during an integration time period, which corresponds to an intensity of light received during the integration time period. Integration of the photo-generated carriers at one, and not both, of the capacitors may simplify the determination of the amount of received light. Further, unused readout circuit, such as the second readout circuit 2430 , may be shut down to save power. In some implementations, the second intensity imaging mode may not require a modulation of the transmitter unit 2202 and a demodulation of the receiver unit 2206 shown in FIG. 22A .
- the operation of the circuit 2400 may be controlled by the control voltage sources 2456 , 2458 , 2405 , and 2407 .
- the control voltages 2455 and 2457 may be a pair of complementary clock signals to demodulate the optical signal received by the photodiode 2480
- the control voltage sources 2456 and 2458 may be output terminals of a clock source included in the imaging system 2200 , such as in the receiver unit 2204 or the processing unit 2206 of FIG. 22A .
- charge injection cancelling and clock feedthrough cancelling techniques may be implemented with the MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 realized by an N-type MOSFET, a P-type MOSFET, or a combination thereof with dummy transistors added at the drain terminals of the MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 .
- the control voltage 2404 may be a programmable reference voltage generated by, for example, a tunable LDO (Low Dropout) regulator, a resistor divider, or a diode-connected N-type MOSFET as the control voltage source 2405 .
- the control voltage 2404 may be set to ensure the operation of the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 in the saturation region or the sub-threshold region.
- the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 may have separate control voltage sources, e.g., V c1a and V c1b , coupled to the gate terminals of the MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , respectively.
- the control voltage sources V c1a and V c1b may sense the drain and/or source voltages of MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , respectively, and generate corresponding control voltages.
- the control voltage sources V c1a and V c1b may be amplifiers with a negative gain.
- control voltage 2406 may be a reset signal configured to periodically reset voltages at nodes 2415 and 2435 .
- the circuit 2400 may be implemented as a P-type circuit.
- the MOSFETs 2412 , 2420 , 2432 , 2440 , 2452 , and 2454 may be P-type MOSFETs
- the source follower circuits 2460 and 2470 may be P-type source followers
- the polarity of the photodiode 2480 may be reversed.
- the MOSFETs 2412 , 2420 , 2432 , 2440 , 2452 , and 2454 may have different polarities.
- MOSFETs 2420 and 2440 may be P-type and the remaining MOSFETs may be N-type.
- the MOSFET 2452 and 2454 may be realized by N-type MOSFET, P-type MOSFET, or a combination of thereof.
- the circuit 2400 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of the circuit 2400 .
- the photodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first and second MOSFET transistors 2412 and 2432 , the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 , and the current-steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- the photodiode 2480 and the current steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first and second MOSFET transistors 2412 and 2432 and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- the photodiode 2480 , the current steering circuit 2450 , and the first and second MOSFET transistors 2412 and 2432 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- FIG. 24B shows a schematic diagram of a circuit 2402 for operating a multi-gate photodiode.
- the circuit 2402 is similar to the circuit 2400 of FIG. 23A , but differs in that the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 of the circuit 2400 have been replaced with a MOSFET 2413 arranged between the photodiode 2480 and the current steering circuit 2450 .
- the MOSFET 2413 may be similar to the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 of FIG. 24A , and may perform an analogous function.
- the MOSFET 2413 may operate as a current buffer that decouples the source voltage from the drain voltage.
- the reverse bias applied to the photodiode 2480 may be reduced through the MOSFET 2413 .
- the photodiode 2480 , the current steering circuit 2450 , and the MOSFET 2413 form a multi-gate photodiode 2484 .
- the photodiode 2480 and the MOSFET 2413 of the multi-gate photodiode 2484 may be analogous to the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , or 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the circuit 2402 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of the circuit 2402 .
- the photodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the MOSFET transistor 2413 , the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 , and the current-steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- the photodiode 2480 and the MOSFET transistor 2413 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the current steering circuit 2450 and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- the photodiode 2480 , the MOSFET transistors 2413 , and the current steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- FIG. 24C shows a schematic diagram of a circuit 2404 for operating a multi-gate photodiode.
- the circuit 2404 is similar to the circuit 2400 of FIG. 23A , but differs in that the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 of the circuit 2400 have been omitted, and the first and second current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 are controlled to operate in a manner similar to the first and second MOSFETs 2412 and 2432 , such that the current steering circuit 2450 may provide a decoupling of the voltage of the capacitors 2422 and 2442 from the junction of the photodiode 2480 while providing the current steering function.
- the third and fourth control voltages 2455 and 2457 may be switched in a digital manner, i.e., from a supply rail voltage (e.g., VDD) to 0 V, to achieve current steering.
- a supply rail voltage e.g., VDD
- the third control voltage 2455 may be set to a voltage that is less than the threshold voltage of the current steering MOSFET 2452 to operate the MOSFET 2452 in the subthreshold region, and the fourth control voltage 2457 may be set to 0 V or a voltage substantially equal to 0 V to operate the MOSFET 2454 in the cut-off region.
- the third control voltage 2455 may be set to a voltage that is greater than the threshold voltage of the current steering MOSFET 2452 while maintaining the voltage difference between the drain and the gate terminals of the current steering MOSFET 2452 at a level greater than the threshold voltage of the current steering MOSFET 2452 to operate the MOSFET 2452 in the saturation region, and the fourth control voltage 2457 may be set to 0 V or a voltage substantially equal to 0 V to operate the MOSFET 2454 in the cut-off region.
- the third and fourth control voltage sources 2456 and 2458 may include adjustable voltage buffers for generating control voltages 2455 and 2457 that are configured to operate the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 in the subthreshold or saturation region.
- the adjustable voltage buffer may receive a digital voltage for adjusting the current steering direction. The buffer may then, for example, scale the input digital voltage and adjust a bias-point (e.g., DC component) such that the output control voltages 2455 and 2457 are configured to switch the operating regions of the current steering MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 between the saturation or subthreshold region and the cut-off region.
- a bias-point e.g., DC component
- control voltage sources 2456 and 2458 may sense the drain and/or source voltages of the MOSFETs 2452 and 2454 , respectively, and generate the corresponding control voltages 2455 and 2457 , respectively.
- the control voltage sources 2456 and 2458 may be amplifiers with a negative gain.
- the current steering circuit 2450 and the photodiode 2480 in combination forms a multi-gate photodiode 2482 .
- the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be analogous to the multi-gate photodiode 700 of FIG. 7 , the multi-gate photodiode 800 of FIG. 8 , the multi-gate version of the photodiodes 1010 , 1012 , 1014 , 1100 , 1102 , 1104 , 1106 , 1108 , 1109 , 1160 , or 1162 as described in reference to FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H .
- the vertical PIN diode formed by the p+ GeSi region 731 , the absorption layer 706 , and the n-well region 704 may form the photodiode 2480 .
- the first gate 708 , the first n+ Si region 712 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the first current steering MOSFET transistor 2452
- the second gate 710 , the second n+ Si region 714 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the second current steering MOSFET transistor 2454 .
- the multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be replaced by the switched photodetector described in U.S.
- the circuit 2404 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of the circuit 2404 .
- the photodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the current-steering circuit 2450 and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- the photodiode 2480 and the current steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first and second readout circuits 2410 and 2430 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer.
- photodiode is used in various contexts such as in “photodiode” 2480 , multi-gate “photodiode” 2482 , and multi-gate “photodiode” 2484 , and typically refers to a two-terminal device, it should be understood that, in general, any photon-to-carrier conversion device with two or more terminals that generates photocurrent may be used in place of the photodiode, such as the “photodiode” 2480 , the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482 , or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484 .
- a phototransistor is a three-terminal device in which the photo-generated carriers are amplified by an internal gain (e.g., electron devices N + PN, N + NN + , N + PIN, and N + PINN + ; hole devices P + NP, P + NPP + , P + NIP, and P + NIPP + ).
- the phototransistor may be used in place of the “photodiode” 2480 , the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482 , or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484 .
- a floating-base phototransistor in a two-terminal configuration may also be used in place of the “photodiode” 2480 , the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482 , or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484 .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Electromagnetism (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Solid State Image Pick-Up Elements (AREA)
- Transforming Light Signals Into Electric Signals (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/752,194, filed on Jan. 24, 2020, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/952,088, filed on Apr. 12, 2018, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,707,260, which is a continuation in part of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/228,282, filed on Aug. 4, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,954,016, which claims the right of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/271,386, filed on Dec. 28, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/251,691, filed on Nov. 6, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/217,031, filed on Sep. 11, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/211,004, filed on Aug. 28, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/210,991, filed on Aug. 28, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/210,946, filed on Aug. 27, 2015, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/209,349, filed on Aug. 25, 2015, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/200,652, filed on Aug. 4, 2015. The U.S. application Ser. No. 15/952,088 claims the right of priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/500,457, filed on May 2, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/504,531, filed on May 10, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/583,854, filed on Nov. 9, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/485,003, filed on Apr. 13, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/561,266, filed on Sep. 21, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/613,054, filed on Jan. 3, 2018, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/542,329, filed on Aug. 8, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/643,295, filed on Mar. 15, 2018, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/651,085, filed on Mar. 31, 2018. The entire contents of each previous application is incorporated by reference herein.
- This specification relates to detecting light using a photodiode.
- Light propagates in free space or an optical medium is coupled to a photodiode that converts an optical signal to an electrical signal for processing.
- A photodiode may be used to detect optical signals and convert the optical signals to electrical signals that may be further processed by another circuitry. Photodiodes may be used in consumer electronics products, image sensors, data communications, time-of-flight (TOF) applications, medical devices, and many other suitable applications. Conventionally, silicon is used as an image sensor material, but silicon has a low optical absorption efficiency for wavelengths in the near-infrared (NIR) spectrum or longer. Other materials and/or material alloys such as germanium and germanium-silicon may be used as image sensor materials with innovative optical device structure design described in this specification. According to one innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification, a photodiode is formed using materials such as germanium or germanium-silicon to increase the speed and/or the sensitivity and/or the dynamic range and/or the operating wavelength range of the device. In one embodiment, photodiodes formed using germanium or germanium-silicon and photodiodes formed using silicon may be integrated on a common substrate to yield a photodiode array having a greater operating wavelength range.
- According to another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification, light reflected from a three-dimensional object may be detected by photodiodes of an imaging system. The photodiodes convert the detected light into electrical charges. Each photodiode may include multiple gates that are controlled to collect the electrical charges. The collection of the electrical charges controlled by the multiple gates may be altered over time, such that the imaging system may determine the phase and other information of the sensed light. The imaging system may use the phase information to analyze characteristics associated with the three-dimensional object including depth information or a material composition. The imaging system may also use the phase information to analyze characteristics associated with eye-gesture recognition, body-gesture recognition, three-dimensional model scanning/video recording, and/or augmented/virtual reality applications.
- In general, one innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in an optical apparatus that includes: a semiconductor substrate formed from a first material, the semiconductor substrate including a first n-doped region; and a photodiode supported by the semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, the absorption region being formed from a second material different than the first material and including: a first p-doped region; and a second n-doped region coupled to the first n-doped region, wherein a second doping concentration of the second n-doped region is less than or substantially equal to a first doping concentration of the first n-doped region.
- Embodiments of the optical apparatus can include one or more of the following features. For example, the semiconductor substrate can be formed by bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer. The first material can be silicon and the second material can include germanium.
- In some embodiments, the first doping concentration of the first n-doped region can be substantially equal to 16 times the second doping concentration of the second n-doped region.
- In some embodiments, the first and second doping concentrations can be set such that a first Fermi level of the first n-doped region and a second Fermi level of the second n-doped region are substantially equal.
- In some embodiments, the first p-doped region can be arranged on a first surface of the absorption region, and the second n-doped region can be arranged on a second surface opposing the first surface.
- In some embodiments, the first p-doped region and the second n-doped region can be arranged on a first surface of the absorption region.
- In some embodiments, the semiconductor substrate can further include a recess, and at least a portion of the absorption region can be embedded in the recess. In some embodiments, the recess can include a sidewall spacer. In some embodiments, the first n-doped region can surround at least a portion of the recess. In some embodiments, the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region can be adjacent.
- In some embodiments, the optical apparatus can further include a first metallic interconnect coupled to the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region.
- In some embodiments, the optical apparatus can further include: one or more readout regions coupled to one or more readout circuits, the one or more readout regions configured to provide the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to the one or more readout circuits; and one or more gates coupled to one or more control signals that control carrier transports between the photodiode and the one or more readout regions. The one or more readout regions and the one or more gates can be supported by the semiconductor substrate. The one or more readout regions can further include one or more floating-diffusion capacitors.
- In some embodiments, the optical apparatus can further include: a lens supported by the semiconductor substrate. The lens can be integrally formed on the semiconductor substrate.
- In some embodiments, the optical apparatus can further include: a spacer layer supported by the semiconductor substrate, wherein, in a direction normal to a substrate surface, the spacer layer is arranged between the absorption region and the lens. The spacer layer can have a thickness corresponding to a focal length of the lens.
- In some embodiments, the optical apparatus can further include: an anti-reflection layer supported by the semiconductor substrate and arranged between the semiconductor substrate and the lens.
- Another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in an optical apparatus that includes: a semiconductor substrate formed from a first material and including a recess; and a photodiode supported by the semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, wherein the absorption region is formed from a second material different than the first material and at least a portion of the absorption region is embedded in the recess, and wherein the absorption region includes: a first p-doped region; a first n-doped region; a second n-doped region; and a first gate coupled to a first control signal and configured to control a carrier transport between the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region, wherein a first doping concentration of the first n-doped region is less than or substantially equal to a second doping concentration of the second n-doped region.
- Another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in an optical apparatus that includes: a first semiconductor substrate formed from a first material and including a recess; a photodiode supported by the first semiconductor substrate, the photodiode including an absorption region configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons, wherein the absorption region is formed from a second material different than the first material and at least a portion of the absorption region is embedded in the recess, and wherein the absorption region includes: a first p-doped region; and a first n-doped region; a second semiconductor substrate formed from a third material different than the second material, the second semiconductor substrate including: a second n-doped region; one or more readout regions coupled to one or more readout circuits, the one or more readout regions configured to provide the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to the one or more readout circuits; and one or more gates coupled to one or more control signals that control carrier transports between the photodiode and the one or more readout regions; and a metallic interconnect coupled to the first n-doped region and the second n-doped region, wherein a first doping concentration of the first n-doped region is less than or substantially equal to a second doping concentration of the second n-doped region.
- Another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first MOSFET transistor including: a first channel terminal coupled to a first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; a second channel terminal; and a gate terminal coupled to a first control voltage source; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; and a current-steering circuit configured to steer the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to one or both of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit, the current-steering circuit including: a first current-steering MOSFET transistor including a second gate terminal coupled to a second control voltage source, a third channel terminal coupled to the second channel terminal, and a fourth channel terminal coupled to the first readout circuit; and a second current-steering MOSFET transistor including a third gate terminal coupled to a third control voltage source, a fifth channel terminal coupled to the second channel terminal, and a sixth channel terminal coupled to the second readout circuit, wherein, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source generates a first control voltage configured to create a first voltage difference between the first voltage and a third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode, and to create a second voltage difference between the second voltage and the third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode.
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features. For example, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first MOSFET transistor, the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the first MOSFET transistor are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode, the first MOSFET transistor, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region.
- In some embodiments, the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage, and the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source can reduce a first dark current integrated by the first capacitor and a second dark current integrated by the second capacitor relative to a comparable circuit without the first MOSFET transistor.
- In some embodiments, the photodiode can further include a light absorption region including germanium.
- In some embodiments, the photodiode can further include a recess, and at least a portion of the light absorption region can be embedded in the recess.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- Another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; a first MOSFET transistor including: a first channel terminal; a second channel terminal coupled to the first readout circuit; and a first gate terminal coupled to a first control voltage source; a second MOSFET transistor including: a third channel terminal; a fourth channel terminal coupled to the second readout circuit; and a second gate terminal coupled to the first control voltage source; and a current-steering circuit configured to steer the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to one or both of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit, the current-steering circuit including: a first current-steering MOSFET transistor including a third gate terminal coupled to a second control voltage source, a fifth channel terminal coupled to a first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode, and a sixth channel terminal coupled to the first channel terminal; and a second current-steering MOSFET transistor including a fourth gate terminal coupled to a third control voltage source, a seventh channel terminal coupled to the first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode, and an eighth channel terminal coupled to the third channel terminal, wherein, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source generates a first control voltage configured to create a first voltage difference between the first voltage and a third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode, and to create a second voltage difference between the second voltage and the third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode.
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features. For example, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first MOSFET transistor, the second MOSFET transistor, the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, the first MOSFET transistor, and the second MOSFET transistor are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode, the current-steering circuit, the first MOSFET transistor, and the second MOSFET transistor are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first MOSFET transistor and the second MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region.
- In some embodiments, the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage, and the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source can reduce a first dark current integrated by the first capacitor and a second dark current integrated by the second capacitor relative to a comparable circuit without the first MOSFET transistor and the second MOSFET transistor.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the second control voltage source and the third control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- Another innovative aspect of the subject matter described in this specification can be embodied in a circuit that includes: a photodiode configured to absorb photons and to generate photo-carriers from the absorbed photons; a first readout circuit configured to output a first readout voltage, the first readout circuit including: a first capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a first reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the first capacitor to a first voltage; a second readout circuit configured to output a second readout voltage, the second readout circuit including: a second capacitor configured to integrate the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode; and a second reset MOSFET transistor configured to charge the second capacitor to a second voltage; and a current-steering circuit configured to steer the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode to one or both of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit, the current-steering circuit including: a first current-steering MOSFET transistor including a first gate terminal coupled to a first control voltage source, a first channel terminal coupled to a first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode, and a second channel terminal coupled to the first readout circuit; and a second current-steering MOSFET transistor including a second gate terminal coupled to a second control voltage source, a third channel terminal coupled to the first terminal of the photodiode and configured to collect a portion of the photo-carriers generated by the photodiode, and a fourth channel terminal coupled to the second readout circuit, wherein, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source generates a first control voltage configured to create a first voltage difference between the first voltage and a third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode, and the second control voltage source generates a second control voltage configured to create a second voltage difference between the second voltage and the third voltage of the first terminal of the photodiode.
- Embodiments of the circuit can include one or more of the following features. For example, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode is supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit, the second readout circuit, and the current-steering circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, the circuit can further include a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer, wherein the photodiode and the current-steering circuit are supported by the first semiconductor layer, and the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit are supported by the second semiconductor layer.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage can be configured to operate the first current-steering MOSFET transistor in a subthreshold region or a saturation region, and the second control voltage can be configured to operate the second current-steering MOSFET transistor in the subthreshold region or the saturation region.
- In some embodiments, the first voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the first voltage, and the second voltage difference can be greater than or equal to 10% of the second voltage.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in a time-of-flight imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit for a first period, and steering the photo-carriers to the second readout circuit for a second period.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit in a synchronous manner.
- In some embodiments, during operation of the circuit, the first control voltage source and the second control voltage source can be controlled to operate the circuit in an intensity imaging mode by steering the photo-carriers to one of the first readout circuit and the second readout circuit while operating in the intensity imaging mode.
- Advantageous implementations may include one or more of the following features. Germanium is an efficient absorption material for near-infrared wavelengths, which reduces the problem of slow photo-carriers generated at a greater substrate depth when an inefficient absorption material, e.g., silicon, is used. An increased device bandwidth allows the use of a higher modulation frequency in an optical sensing system, giving advantages such as a greater depth resolution. A germanium-silicon alloy material as the optical absorption layer with innovative design provides higher optical absorption efficiency over conventional Si material, which may provide a more sensitive sensor in the visible and near-infrared spectrums, may reduce crosstalk between neighboring pixels, and may allow for a reduction of pixel sizes. A hybrid sensor design may support time-of-flight (TOF), near-infrared, and visible image sensing within the same sensing array. An increased device bandwidth allows the use of a higher modulation frequency in a time-of-flight system, giving a greater depth resolution. In a time-of-flight system where the peak intensity of optical pulses is increased while the duty cycle of the optical pulses is decreased, the signal-to-noise ratio can be improved while maintaining substantially the same power consumption for the time-of-flight system. This is made possible when the device bandwidth is increased so that the duty cycle of the optical pulses can be decreased without distorting the pulse shape.
- The details of one or more implementations are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other potential features and advantages will become apparent from the description, the drawings, and the claims.
-
FIG. 1 is an example of a photodiode array. -
FIG. 2 is an example of a photodiode array. -
FIG. 3 is an example of a photodiode array. -
FIGS. 4A and 4B are examples of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light. -
FIG. 5 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light. -
FIG. 6 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible and infrared light. -
FIG. 7 is an example of a multi-gate photodiode. -
FIG. 8 is an example of a multi-gate photodiode. -
FIGS. 9A-9C are examples of a photodetector. -
FIG. 10A shows an example band diagram across a silicon substrate and a germanium mesa. -
FIGS. 10B-10D show examples of photodiodes with reduced built-in potential. -
FIGS. 11A-11F show examples of photodiodes with improved carrier transfer. -
FIGS. 11G and 11H show examples of wafer-bonded photodiodes. -
FIG. 12 is an example of a photodiode for detecting visible or infrared light. -
FIG. 13 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light. -
FIG. 14 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light. -
FIG. 15 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light. -
FIG. 16 is an example of an integrated photodiode array for detecting visible and/or infrared light. -
FIGS. 17A-17D illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array. -
FIGS. 18A-18D illustrate an example of a design for forming germanium-silicon. -
FIGS. 19A-19D illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array. -
FIGS. 20A-20F illustrate an example design for fabricating a photodiode array. -
FIGS. 21A-21B are cross-sectional views of example configurations of microlenses integrated with photodetectors. -
FIG. 22A is a block diagram of an example of an imaging system. -
FIGS. 22B and 22C show examples of techniques for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system. -
FIG. 23 shows an example of a flow diagram for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system. -
FIGS. 24A-24C show schematic diagrams of circuits for operating a multi-gate photodiode. - Like reference numbers and designations in the various drawings indicate like elements. It is also to be understood that the various exemplary embodiments shown in the figures are merely illustrative representations and are not necessarily drawn to scale.
- Photodiodes may be used to detect optical signals and convert the optical signals to electrical signals that may be further processed by another circuitry. In general, a material absorbs light at various wavelengths to generate free carriers depending on an energy bandgap associated with the material. For example, at room temperature, silicon may have an energy bandgap of 1.12 eV, germanium may have an energy bandgap of 0.66 eV, and a germanium-silicon alloy may have an energy bandgap between 0.66 eV and 1.12 eV depending on the composition. In general, a material having a lower energy bandgap has a higher absorption coefficient at a particular wavelength. If the absorption coefficient of a material is too low, the optical signal cannot be converted to an electrical signal efficiently. However, if the absorption coefficient of a material is too high, free carriers will be generated near the surface of the material, which may be recombined to reduce efficiency. Silicon is not an efficient sensor material for NIR wavelengths due to its large bandgap. On the other hand, germanium has an absorption coefficient that may be too high for shorter wavelengths (e.g., blue), where free carriers may recombine at the surface. A photodiode array that integrates silicon and germanium/germanium-silicon on a common substrate, where a photodiode array uses silicon to detect visible light and uses germanium or germanium-silicon to detect NIR light, would enable the photodiode array to have a wide detection spectrum. In this application, the term “photodiode” may be used interchangeably as the term “photodetector” or the term “optical sensor”. In this application, the term “germanium-silicon (GeSi)”, “silicon-germanium (SiGe)” may be used interchangeably, and both include all suitable SiGe composition combinations from more than 90% germanium (Ge) to more than 90% silicon (Si). In this application, the GeSi layer may be formed using blanket epitaxy, selective epitaxy, or other applicable technique. Furthermore, a strained super lattice structure including multiple layers such as alternating SiGe layer with different compositions may be used for the absorption or forming a quantum well structure.
-
FIG. 1 is an example aphotodiode array 100 where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes. An optical image sensor array is an example of a photodiode array. Thephotodiode array 100 includes asubstrate 102, anintegrated circuit layer 104, aninterconnect layer 106, asensor layer 108, afilter layer 110, and alens layer 112. In general, light of a single wavelength or multiple wavelengths enters thelens layer 112, where the light may be focused, collimated, expanded, or processed according to the lens design. The light then enters thefilter layer 110, where thefilter layer 110 may be configured to pass light having a specific wavelength range. The photodiodes in thesensor layer 108 converts the incident light into free carriers. Theintegrated circuit layer 104 collects the free carriers through theinterconnect layer 106 and processes the free carriers according to the specific application. - In general, the
substrate 102 may be a silicon substrate, a silicon-on-insulator (SOI) substrate, or any other suitable carrier substrate materials. The integrated circuits of theintegrated circuit layer 104 and the interconnects of theinterconnect layer 106 may be fabricated using CMOS processing techniques. For example, the interconnects may be formed by dry-etching a contact hole through a dielectric layer and filling the contact hole by a copper using chemical vapor deposition (CVD). Furthermore, the shape of the lens could be concave, convex, planar with surface structure, or other shapes, and its shape should not be limited by the exemplary drawings here. - The
sensor layer 108 includes multiple groups of photodiodes for detecting light of different wavelength ranges. For example, a group of photodiodes that includesphotodiodes photodiodes photodiodes photodiode 128 a and others not shown in this figure may be configured to detect light of a NIR wavelength range (e.g., 850 nm±40 nm, 940 nm±40 nm, or >1 μm). Each photodiode may be isolated by insulating sidewall spacers, trenches, or other suitable isolation structures. - In some implementations, the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by an optical filter in the
filter layer 110. For example, thephotodiode 126 a is configured to receive a red wavelength range, where the center wavelength and the limits of the wavelength range are controlled by the characteristics of the filter above thephotodiode 126 a. A filter may be formed by depositing layers of dielectric materials, such that light having a wavelength within a specific wavelength range would pass through the filter and light having a wavelength outside the specific wavelength range would be reflected by the filter. A filter may also be formed by forming a layer of a material on the photodiode, such that light having a wavelength within a specific wavelength range would pass through the filter and light having a wavelength outside the specific wavelength range would be absorbed by the filter. For example, a silicon layer may be formed on a germanium-silicon photodiode, where the silicon layer absorbs visible light but is transparent to NIR light. - In some implementations, the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by a material composition of the photodiode. For example, an increase in germanium composition in a germanium-silicon alloy may increase the sensitivity of the photodiode at longer wavelengths. In some implementations, the wavelength range that a photodiode is configured to detect may be controlled by a combination of the optical filter and the material composition of the photodiode.
- In some implementations, the groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light (e.g., red, green, and blue) may be silicon photodiodes, while the group of photodiodes that are configured to detect NIR light may be germanium photodiodes or germanium-silicon photodiodes.
- In some other implementations, one or more groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light (e.g., green and blue) may be silicon photodiodes, while one or more other groups of photodiodes that are configured to detect visible light (e.g., red) and the group of photodiodes that are configured to detect NIR light may be germanium photodiodes or germanium-silicon photodiodes. For example, the group of photodiodes that detect red light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a lower germanium concentration than the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light. In some implementations, the germanium concentration may range from 10% to 100%. As another example, the group of photodiodes that detect red light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a different thickness from the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light.
-
FIG. 2 is anexample photodiode array 200 that shows a top view of a two-dimensional photodiode array, where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes. The photodiodes in thephotodiode array 200 are similar to the photodiodes described in thephotodiode array 100. The photodiodes of thephotodiode array 200 are arranged as pixels. In some implementations, silicon photodiodes are formed as pixels for detecting visible light, and germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are embedded in the silicon as pixels for detecting NIR light. In some other implementations, silicon photodiodes are formed as pixels for detecting blue and green light, and germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are embedded in the silicon as pixels for detecting red and NIR light. -
FIG. 3 is anexample photodiode array 300, where germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes are integrated with silicon photodiodes. The photodiodes in thephotodiode array 300 are similar to the photodiodes described in thephotodiode array 100. In addition, thephotodiode array 300 includes a group ofphotodiodes 302 a, 302 b, and others not shown in this figure that are configured to detect light of a white wavelength range (e.g., 420 nm to 660 nm). In some implementations, thephotodiodes 302 a and 302 b may be silicon photodiodes. In some other implementations, thephotodiodes 302 a and 302 b may be germanium or germanium-silicon photodiodes to improve the overall light absorption of the diodes. For example, the group of photodiodes that detect white light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a lower germanium concentration than the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light. As another example, the group of photodiodes that detect white light may be germanium-silicon photodiodes having a different thickness from the germanium-silicon photodiodes in the group of photodiodes that detect NIR light. -
FIG. 4A illustratesexample photodiodes 400 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals. The example photodiodes 400 includes anNIR pixel 402 and avisible pixel 404 that are formed on a common substrate. TheNIR pixel 402 and thevisible pixel 404 are separated by anisolation structure 406. TheNIR pixel 402 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range. Thevisible pixel 404 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red). TheNIR pixel 402 and thevisible pixel 404 may be photodiodes in thesensor layer 108 as described in reference toFIG. 1 , for example. - The
visible pixel 404 includes an n-Si region 412, ap+ Si region 413, a p-Si region 414, ann+ Si region 415, afirst gate 416, afirst control signal 417 coupled to thefirst gate 416, and areadout circuit 418 coupled to then+ Si region 415. The n-Si region 412 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with phosphorus. Thep+ Si region 413 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with boron. The p-Si region 414 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 1015 cm−3 with boron. Then+ Si region 415 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with phosphorous. - In general, the n-
Si layer 412 receives anoptical signal 408 and converts theoptical signal 408 into electrical signals. Theoptical signal 408 enters the n-Si region 412, where the n-Si region 412 absorbs theoptical signal 408 and converts the absorbed light into free carriers. In some implementations, theoptical signal 408 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 408 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In general, a difference between the Fermi level of the p+ Si
region 413 and the Fermi level of the n-Si region 412 creates an electric field between the two regions, where free electrons generated by the n-Si region 412 are drifted to a region below thep+ Si region 413 by the electric field. Thefirst gate 416 may be coupled to thefirst control signal 417. For example, thefirst gate 416 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thefirst control signal 417 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thefirst control signal 417 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p+Si region 413 to then+ Si region 415. For example, if a voltage of thecontrol signal 417 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below thep+ Si region 413 will drift to then+ Si region 415. - The
n+ Si region 415 may be coupled to thefirst readout circuit 418. Thefirst readout circuit 418 may be in a three-transistor configuration consisting of a reset gate, a source-follower, and a selection gate, or any suitable circuitry for processing free carriers. In some implementations, thefirst readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on a substrate that is common to thevisible pixel 404. For example, thefirst readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on theintegrated circuit layer 104 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some other implementations, thefirst readout circuit 418 may be fabricated on another substrate and co-packaged with thevisible pixel 404 via die/wafer bonding or stacking. - The
NIR pixel 402 includes an n-Si region 422, ap+ Si region 423, a p-Si region 424, ann+ Si region 425, asecond gate 426, asecond control signal 427 coupled to thesecond gate 426, asecond readout circuit 428 coupled to then+ Si region 425, ap+ GeSi region 431, and anintrinsic GeSi region 433. The n-Si region 422 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with phosphorus. Thep+ Si region 423 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with boron. The p-Si region 424 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 1015 cm−3 with boron. Then+ Si region 425 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with phosphorous. - In general, the
intrinsic GeSi region 433 receives anoptical signal 406 and converts theoptical signal 406 into electrical signals. In some implementations, theoptical signal 406 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 406 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In some implementations, a thickness of the
intrinsic GeSi region 433 may be between 0.05 μm to 2 μm. In some implementations, theintrinsic GeSi region 433 may include ap+ GeSi region 431. Thep+ GeSi region 431 may repel the photo-electrons away from theintrinsic GeSi region 433 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency. For example, thep+ GeSi region 431 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 when theintrinsic GeSi region 433 is germanium and doped with boron. - The generated free carriers in the
intrinsic GeSi region 433 may drift or diffuse into the n-Si region 422. In general, a difference between the Fermi level of the p+ Siregion 423 and the Fermi level of the n-Si region 422 creates an electric field between the two regions, where free electrons collected from theintrinsic GeSi region 433 by the n-Si region 422 are drifted to a region below thep+ Si region 423 by the electric field. Thesecond gate 426 may be coupled to thesecond control signal 427. For example, thesecond gate 426 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thesecond control signal 427 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thesecond control signal 427 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below thep+ Si region 423 to then+ Si region 425. For example, if a voltage of thesecond control signal 427 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below thep+ Si region 423 will drift to then+ Si region 425. Then+ Si region 425 may be coupled to thesecond readout circuit 428. Thesecond readout circuit 428 may be similar to thefirst readout circuit 418. - Although not shown in
FIG. 4A , in some other implementations, thevisible pixel 404 and theNIR pixel 402 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons. In this case, thep+ Si regions Si regions Si regions n+ Si region -
FIG. 4B illustratesexample photodiodes 450 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals. Thephotodiodes 450 includes avisible pixel 454 and anNIR pixel 452. Thevisible pixel 454 is similar to thevisible pixel 404 as described in reference toFIG. 4A . TheNIR pixel 452 is similar to theNIR pixel 402 as described in reference toFIG. 4A . Here, the surface of thevisible pixel 454 and theNIR pixel 452 that receiveoptical signals intrinsic GeSi region 462 and thep+ GeSi region 464 are embedded in anoxide layer 456. For example, theoxide layer 456 may be formed on the p-Si region 466. A thickness of theoxide layer 456 may be selected to be the thickness of theintrinsic GeSi region 462. A sensor region may be formed in theoxide layer 456 by etching or any other suitable techniques. Germanium-silicon may be selectively grown in the sensor region to form theintrinsic GeSi region 462. A planarized surface between thevisible pixel 454 and theNIR pixel 452 enables additional processing on the photodiode surface and/or bonding with devices fabricated on a separate substrate. -
FIG. 5 illustratesexample photodiodes 500 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals. The example photodiodes 500 includes anNIR pixel 502 and avisible pixel 504 that are formed on a common substrate. TheNIR pixel 502 and thevisible pixel 504 are separated by anisolation structure 506. TheNIR pixel 502 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range. Thevisible pixel 504 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red). TheNIR pixel 502 and thevisible pixel 504 may be photodiodes in thesensor layer 108 as described in reference toFIG. 1 , for example. - The
visible pixel 504 includes an n-Si region 512, ap+ Si region 513, a p-Si region 514, ann+ Si region 515, afirst gate 516, afirst control signal 517 coupled to thefirst gate 516, and areadout circuit 518 coupled to then+ Si region 515. The n-Si region 512 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with phosphorus. Thep+ Si region 513 may have a p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with boron. The p-Si region 514 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 1015 cm−3 with boron. Then+ Si region 515 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with phosphorous. - In general, the
p+ Si layer 513 receives anoptical signal 508. Since the thickness of the p+ Silayer 513 is generally thin (e.g., 100 nm), theoptical signal 508 propagates into the n-Si region 512, where the n-Si region 512 absorbs theoptical signal 508 and converts theoptical signal 508 into free carriers. In some implementations, theoptical signal 508 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 508 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In general, a difference between the Fermi level of the p+ Si
region 513 and the Fermi level of the n-Si region 512 creates an electric field between the two regions, where free electrons generated by the n-Si region 512 are drifted to a region below thep+ Si region 513 by the electric field. Thefirst gate 516 may be coupled to thefirst control signal 517. For example, thefirst gate 516 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thefirst control signal 517 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thefirst control signal 517 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p+Si region 513 to then+ Si region 515. For example, if a voltage of thecontrol signal 517 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below thep+ Si region 513 will drift to then+ Si region 515 for collection. Then+ Si region 515 may be coupled to thefirst readout circuit 518 that processes the collected electrical signal. Thefirst readout circuit 518 may be similar to thefirst readout circuit 418 as described in reference toFIG. 4A . - The
NIR pixel 502 includes an n-Si region 522, a p-Si region 524, ann+ Si region 525, asecond gate 526, asecond control signal 527 coupled to thesecond gate 526, asecond readout circuit 528 coupled to then+ Si region 525, ap+ GeSi region 531, and anintrinsic GeSi region 533. The n-Si region 522 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with phosphorus. The p-Si region 524 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 1015 cm−3 with boron. Then+ Si region 525 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with phosphorous. - The
p+ GeSi region 531 receives anoptical signal 535 and converts theoptical signal 406 into electrical signals. Since the thickness of the p+ GeSilayer 531 is generally thin (e.g., 100 nm), theoptical signal 535 propagates into theintrinsic GeSi region 533, where theintrinsic GeSi region 533 absorbs theoptical signal 535 and converts theoptical signal 535 into free carriers. In some implementations, theoptical signal 535 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 535 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In some implementations, a thickness of the
intrinsic GeSi region 533 may be between 0.05 μm to 2 μm. In some implementations, thep+ GeSi region 531 may repel the photo-electrons away from theintrinsic GeSi region 533 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency. For example, thep+ GeSi region 531 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 when theintrinsic GeSi region 533 is germanium and doped with boron. - The generated free carriers in the
intrinsic GeSi region 533 may drift or diffuse into the n-Si region 522. In some implementations, a source supply voltage Vss may be applied to theNIR pixel 502 to create an electric field between thep+ GeSi region 531 and the n-Si region 522, such that the free electrons may drift towards the n-Si region 522 while the free holes may drift towards thep+ GeSi region 531. - The
second gate 526 may be coupled to thesecond control signal 527. For example, thesecond gate 526 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thesecond control signal 527 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thesecond control signal 527 controls a flow of free electrons from the n-Si region 522 to then+ Si region 525. For example, if a voltage of thesecond control signal 527 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the n-Si region 522 will drift towards the n+ Siregion 525. Then+ Si region 525 may be coupled to thesecond readout circuit 528 for further processing of the collected electrical signal. Thesecond readout circuit 528 may be similar to thefirst readout circuit 418 as described in reference toFIG. 4A . - Although not shown in
FIG. 5 , in some other implementations, thevisible pixel 504 and theNIR pixel 502 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons. In this case, thep+ Si region 513 would be replaced by an n+ Si region, the n-Si regions Si regions n+ Si region -
FIG. 6 illustratesexample photodiodes 600 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals. Thephotodiodes 600 includes avisible pixel 654 and anNIR pixel 652. Thevisible pixel 654 is similar to thevisible pixel 504 as described in reference toFIG. 5 . TheNIR pixel 652 is similar to theNIR pixel 502 as described in reference toFIG. 5 . Here, the surface of thevisible pixel 654 and theNIR pixel 652 that receiveoptical signals intrinsic GeSi region 662 and thep+ GeSi region 664 are embedded in anoxide layer 656. A planarized surface between thevisible pixel 654 and theNIR pixel 652 enables additional processing on the photodiode surface and/or bonding with devices fabricated on a separate substrate. - In time-of-flight (TOF) applications, depth information of a three-dimensional object may be determined using a phase difference between a transmitted light pulse and a detected light pulse. For example, a two-dimensional array of pixels may be used to reconstruct a three-dimensional image of a three-dimensional object, where each pixel may include one or more photodiodes for deriving phase information of the three-dimensional object. In some implementations, time-of-flight applications use light sources having wavelengths in the near-infrared (NIR) range. For example, a light-emitting-diode (LED) may have a wavelength of 850 nm, 940 nm, 1050 nm, or 1310 nm. Some photodiodes may use silicon as an absorption material, but silicon is an inefficient absorption material for NIR wavelengths. Specifically, photo-carriers may be generated deeply (e.g., greater than 10 μm in depth) in the silicon substrate, and those photo-carriers may drift and/or diffuse to the photodiode junction slowly, which results in a decrease in the device bandwidth. Moreover, a small voltage swing is typically used to control photodiode operations in order to minimize power consumption. For a large absorption area (e.g., 10 μm in diameter), the small voltage swing can only create a small lateral/vertical field across the large absorption area, which affects the drift velocity of the photo-carriers being swept across the absorption area. The device bandwidth is therefore further limited. For TOF applications using NIR wavelengths, a multi-gate photodiode using germanium-silicon (GeSi) as an absorption material addresses the technical issues discussed above.
-
FIG. 7 is anexample multi-gate photodiode 700 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal. Themulti-gate photodiode 700 includes anabsorption layer 706 fabricated on asubstrate 702. Thesubstrate 702 may be any suitable substrate where semiconductor devices can be fabricated on. For example, thesubstrate 702 may be a silicon substrate. The coupling between theabsorption layer 706 and a firstn+ Si region 712 is controlled by afirst gate 708. The coupling between theabsorption layer 706 and a second n+ Siregion 714 is controlled by asecond gate 710. - In general, the
absorption layer 706 receives anoptical signal 712 and converts theoptical signal 712 into electrical signals. Theabsorption layer 706 is selected to have a high absorption coefficient at the desired wavelength range. For NIR wavelengths, theabsorption layer 706 may be a GeSi mesa, where the GeSi absorbs photons in theoptical signal 712 and generates electron-hole pairs. The material composition of germanium and silicon in the GeSi mesa may be selected for specific processes or applications. In some implementations, theabsorption layer 706 is designed to have a thickness t. For example, for 850 nm wavelength, the thickness of the GeSi mesa may be approximately 1 μm to have a substantial quantum efficiency. In some implementations, the surface of theabsorption layer 706 is designed to have a specific shape. For example, the GeSi mesa may be circular, square, or rectangular depending on the spatial profile of theoptical signal 712 on the surface of the GeSi mesa. In some implementations, theabsorption layer 706 is designed to have a lateral dimension d for receiving theoptical signal 712. For example, the GeSi mesa may have a circular shape, where d can range from 1 μm to 50 μm. - In some implementations, the
absorption layer 706 may include ap+ GeSi region 731. Thep+ GeSi region 731 may repel the photo-electrons from the surface of theabsorption region 706 and thereby may increase the device bandwidth. For example, thep+ GeSi region 731 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 when theabsorption region 706 is germanium and doped with boron. - The
multi-gate photodiode 700 includes an n-well region 704 implanted in thesubstrate 702. For example, the doping level of the n-well region 704 may range from 1015 cm−3 to 1020 cm−3. In general, the n-well region 704 is used to collect electrons generated by theabsorption region 706. - The
first gate 708 is coupled to afirst control signal 722 and afirst readout circuit 724. For example, thefirst gate 708 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thefirst control signal 722 may be a time-varying multi-level voltage signal from the voltage source. Thefirst readout circuit 724 may be in a three-transistor configuration consisting of a reset gate, a source-follower, and a selection gate, or any suitable circuitry for processing free carriers. In some implementations, thefirst readout circuit 724 may be fabricated on thesubstrate 702. In some other implementations, thefirst readout circuit 724 may be fabricated on another substrate and co-packaged with themulti-gate photodiode 700 via die/wafer bonding or stacking. Thesecond gate 710 is coupled to asecond control signal 732 and asecond readout circuit 734. Thesecond control signal 732 is similar to thefirst control signal 722, and thesecond readout circuit 734 is similar to thefirst readout circuit 724. - The
first control signal 722 and thesecond control signal 732 are used to control the collection of electrons generated by the absorbed photons. For example, when thefirst gate 708 is turned “on” and the second gate is turned “off”, electrons would drift from the n-well region 704 to then+ Si region 712. Conversely, when thefirst gate 708 is turned “off” and the second gate is turned “on”, electrons would drift from the n-well region 704 to then+ Si region 714. In some implementations, a voltage may be applied between thep+ GeSi region 731 and the n-well 704 to increase the electric field inside theabsorption layer 706 for drifting the electrons towards the n-well region 704. -
FIG. 8 is anexample multi-gate photodiode 800 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal. Themulti-gate photodiode 800 includes anabsorption layer 806 fabricated on asubstrate 802. Thesubstrate 802 may be any suitable substrate where semiconductor devices can be fabricated on. For example, thesubstrate 802 may be a silicon substrate. The coupling between theabsorption layer 806 and a firstp+ Si region 812 is controlled by afirst gate 808. The coupling between theabsorption layer 806 and a second p+ Si region 814 is controlled by asecond gate 810. - In general, the
absorption layer 806 receives anoptical signal 812 and converts theoptical signal 812 into electrical signals. Theabsorption layer 806 is similar to theabsorption layer 706 as described in reference toFIG. 7 . In some implementations, theabsorption layer 806 may include ann+ GeSi region 831. Then+ GeSi region 831 may repel the holes from the surface of theabsorption region 806 and thereby may increase the device bandwidth. For example, then+ GeSi region 831 may have a n+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 when theabsorption region 806 is germanium and doped with phosphorus. - The
multi-gate photodiode 800 includes a p-well region 804 implanted in thesubstrate 802. For example, the doping level of the p-well region 804 may range from 1015 cm−3 to 1020 cm−3. In general, the p-well region 804 is used to collect holes generated by theabsorption region 806. - The
first gate 808 is coupled to afirst control signal 822 and afirst readout circuit 824. Thefirst gate 808, thefirst control signal 822, and thefirst readout circuit 824 are similar to thefirst gate 708, thefirst control signal 722, and thefirst readout circuit 724 as described in reference toFIG. 7 . Thesecond gate 810 is coupled to asecond control signal 832 and asecond readout circuit 834. Thesecond gate 810, thesecond control signal 832, and thesecond readout circuit 834 are similar to thesecond gate 710, thesecond control signal 732, and thesecond readout circuit 734 as described in reference toFIG. 7 - The
first control signal 822 and thesecond control signal 832 are used to control the collection of holes generated by the absorbed photons. For example, when thefirst gate 808 is turned “on” and thesecond gate 810 is turned “off”, holes would drift from the p-well region 804 to thep+ Si region 812. Conversely, when thefirst gate 808 is turned “off” and thesecond gate 810 is turned “on”, holes would drift from the p-well region 804 to the p+ Si region 814. In some implementations, a voltage may be applied between then+ GeSi region 831 and the p-well 804 to increase the electric field inside theabsorption layer 806 for drifting the holes towards the p-well region 804. -
FIG. 9A shows anexample photodetector 900 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal. Thephotodetector 900 includes anabsorption layer 906 fabricated on asubstrate 902, and afirst layer 908 formed on top of theabsorption layer 906 and thesubstrate 902. Thesubstrates 902 may be similar to thesubstrate 702 described previously, and the absorption layers 906 may be similar to theabsorption layer 706 described previously, and may be formed, for example, from Ge or GeSi with Ge concentration ranging from 1-99%. The background doping polarity and doping level of the Ge orGeSi absorption layer 906 may be P-type and range from 1014 cm−3 to 1016 cm−3. The background doping level may be due to, for example, explicit incorporation of doping, or due to material defects introduced during formation of theabsorption layer 906. Theabsorption layer 906 of thephotodetector 900 has a mesa structure and is supported by thesubstrate 902, and while a vertical sidewall has been shown, the shape and sidewall profile of the mesa structure may depend on the specifics of the growth and fabrication process for theabsorption layer 906. - The
first layer 908 covers an upper surface and side surfaces of theabsorption layer 906, and covers a portion of an upper surface of thesubstrate 902 on which theabsorption layer 906 is formed. Thefirst layer 908 may be formed from a Complementary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor (CMOS) process compatible material (CPCM), such as amorphous silicon, polysilicon, epitaxial silicon, aluminum oxide family (e.g., Al2O3), silicon oxide family (e.g., SiO2), Ge oxide family (e.g., GeO2), germanium-silicon family (e.g., Ge0.4Si0.6), silicon nitride family (e.g., Si3N4), high-k materials (e.g. HfOx, ZnOx, LaOx, LaSiOx), and any combination thereof. The presence of thefirst layer 908 over the surfaces of theabsorption layer 906 may have various effects. For example, thefirst layer 908 may act as a surface passivation layer to theabsorption layer 906, which may reduce dark current or leakage current generated by defects present at the surface of theabsorption layer 906. In the case of a germanium (Ge) or a germanium-silicon (GeSi)absorption layer 906, the surface defects may be a significant source of dark current or leakage current, which contributes to an increased noise level of the photocurrent generated by thephotodetector 900. By forming thefirst layer 908 over the surfaces of theabsorption layer 906, the dark current or leakage current may be reduced, thereby reducing the noise level of thephotodetector 900. As another example, thefirst layer 908 may modulate a Schottky barrier level between a contact formed on thephotodetector 900 and theabsorption layer 906 and/or thesubstrate 902. The barrier modulation effect is further described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/908,328 titled “HIGH-SPEED LIGHT SENSING APPARATUS II,” which is fully incorporated by reference herein. -
FIG. 9B shows anexample photodetector 910 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal. Thephotodetector 910 is similar to thephotodetector 900 inFIG. 9A , but differs in that theabsorption layer 906 is partially embedded in a recess formed on thesubstrate 902, and thephotodetector 910 further includesspacers 912. Thespacers 912 may be a dielectric material such as various oxides and nitrides that separates the sidewalls of theabsorption layer 906 from thesubstrate 902. In some implementations, thespaces 912 may be omitted, and the embedded portion of theabsorption layer 906 may be in direct contact with a surface of the recess formed in thesubstrate 902, such as a [110] sidewall of a silicon substrate. -
FIG. 9C shows anexample photodetector 920 for converting an optical signal to an electrical signal. Thephotodetector 920 is similar to thephotodetector 910 inFIG. 9B , but differs in that theabsorption layer 906 is fully embedded in the recess formed on thesubstrate 902. - While the photodiodes illustrated and described in relation to
FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have germanium regions or absorption layers that are protruding from a surface of the substrate in a manner similar to thephotodiode 900 shown inFIG. 9A , in general, the previously described photodiodes may be formed to have partially embedded or fully embedded germanium regions or absorption layers as shown inFIG. 9B andFIG. 9C . -
FIG. 10A shows an example band diagram 1000 across a silicon substrate and a germanium mesa. The band diagram 1000 illustrates various energy levels that charge carriers such as electrons and holes experience at various locations of the silicon-germanium heterojunction. The vertical axis corresponds to an energy level E, and the horizontal axis corresponds to a position x across the heterojunction formed between the silicon substrate and the germanium mesa. The silicon substrate and the germanium mesa have respective valence bands with energy level of Ev,si and Ev,ge, and respective conduction bands with energy level of Ec,si, and Ec,ge. Intrinsic fermi levels Ei,si and Ei,ge for silicon and germanium, respectively, have been marked for reference. - In general, different semiconductor materials have different conduction band and valence band energy levels. For example, the energy level of the conduction band of silicon (Ec,si) is approximately 0.05 eV lower than the energy level of the conduction band of germanium (Ec,ge), and the energy level of the valence band of silicon (Ev,si) is approximately 0.4 eV lower than the energy level of the valence band of germanium (Ev,ge). Further, for an intrinsic semiconductor, the fermi level of the semiconductor is at the mid-point between the conduction band and the valence band. As such, the intrinsic fermi level of silicon (Ei,si) is approximately 0.27 eV lower than the intrinsic fermi level of germanium (Ei,ge). Such misalignment in the fermi levels across a Si—Ge heterojunction creates a built-in potential and a depletion region, which impedes a flow of current across the heterojunction. The built-in potential may be overcome by an application of external bias voltage across the heterojunction. However, increasing the external bias voltage may be undesirable in certain cases. For example, increased external bias voltage may increase a dark current generated by a photodiode implementing the Si—Ge heterojunction, increase a power consumed by the photodiode implementing the Si—Ge heterojunction, or a combination thereof. As such, a technique for reducing or eliminating the built-in potential across a heterojunction to enhance a flow of current across the heterojunction will now be described.
- The fermi levels of silicon and germanium may be aligned in various ways to reduce or eliminate the built-in potential. The techniques include 1) doping Ge with P-type dopants, 2) doping Si with N-type dopants, 3) doping Ge with P-type dopants in combination with doping Si with N-type dopants, 4) doping both Ge and Si with N-type dopants, and 5) a combination thereof. The concentrations of the dopants for various scenarios may be determined through standard band-diagram calculations, taking into account the polarity and concentration of an intrinsic doping of a material, and/or an intrinsic carrier concentration of the material. As an example, the calculation has been performed for techniques 1) to 4) described above assuming an intrinsic carrier concentration ni,si of 1010 cm−3 for silicon and an intrinsic carrier concentration of ni,ge of 2*1013 cm−3 for germanium. The Fermi energy level of a semiconductor doped with N-type or P-type dopant at the concentration ND or NA, respectively, is higher than or lower than, respectively, the mid-gap energy level of the semiconductor. The change in the Fermi energy level due to the doping can be calculated by the equations kBT*ln(ND/ni,si) and kBT*ln(NA/ni,si), respectively, wherein kB is the Boltzmann constant and T is the temperature. For the first technique, germanium may be doped with Boron at a concentration of approximately 4*1017 cm−3 (e.g., 6.47*1017 cm−3). For the second technique, silicon may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration of approximately 3*1014 cm−3 (e.g., 3.24*1014 cm−3). For the third technique, germanium may be doped with boron at a concentration less than 6.47*1017 cm−3 (e.g., 4*1017 cm−3 or less) in combination with doping silicon with phosphorous at a concentration less than 3.24*1014 cm−3 (e.g., 3*1014 cm−3 or less). For the fourth technique, germanium may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to G*10{circumflex over ( )}P cm−3 in combination with doping silicon with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 16*G*10{circumflex over ( )}P cm−3.
- It is appreciated that the fourth technique may be advantageous over the first, second, and third techniques for various reasons. For example, the parameters G and P are tunable parameters that may be tuned to control widths of the depletion regions formed around the Si—Ge heterojunction. As another example, the parameters G and P may be tuned such that the resulting doping level falls within a level that can be reliably achieved using standard integrated circuit fabrication techniques. A doping level above 1*1016 cm−3, for example, may be readily achieved using standard dopant implantation techniques. As such, in some implementations, germanium may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 5*1017 cm−3 and silicon may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 8*1018 cm−3.
- Dopant concentrations that are “approximately X” or are “substantially equal to X” may correspond to a range of values that are functionally equivalent to the numerical concentration X, and/or a concentration that is within a fabrication variation of the provided value. For example, a doping concentration that falls within 1%, within 5%, within 25%, or within 50% of X may be considered to be “approximately” or “substantially equal to” X. As another example, a doping concentration that effectively performs the same function as the numerical concentration X, such as reducing or eliminating the built-in potential to a similar degree as X, may be considered to be “approximately” or “substantially equal to” X.
- While an example band diagram and an example calculation has been performed for a heterojunction between pure silicon and pure germanium without intrinsic doping, in general, the described techniques may be applied to heterojunctions of other materials, such as between silicon and silicon-germanium alloy, and to materials with or without intrinsic doping. The silicon-germanium alloy of various compositions may have corresponding conduction band energy level, valence band energy level, and intrinsic fermi level, which may be determined and used in calculating the appropriate doping concentrations for the various techniques that are described.
- The techniques for reducing or eliminating the built-in potential across the Si—Ge heterojunction have been described so far. Now, various examples of photodiodes implementing the built-in potential reduction technique will be described. Referring to
FIG. 10B , anexample photodiode 1010 with reduced built-in potential is shown. Thephotodiode 1010 includes thesubstrate 902, theabsorption layer 906, thefirst layer 908, an n-dopedregion 1030, a p-dopedregion 1031, an n-well 1032, thegate 710, and then+ Si region 714. The operation of thephotodiode 1010 is generally similar to the operation of thephotodiode 700 except as described. - The p-doped
region 1031 is arranged on a first surface of theabsorption region 906 facing away from the surface of thesubstrate 902. The p-dopedregion 1031 may repel the photo-electrons from the surface of theabsorption region 906 and may thereby increase the device bandwidth. For example, the p-dopedregion 1031 may have a p+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3, when theabsorption region 906 is germanium and doped with boron. The p-dopedregion 1031 may be similar to thep+ GeSi region 731 where theabsorption region 906 is a GeSi absorption region. - The n-doped
region 1030 is arranged on a second surface of theabsorption region 906 facing the surface of thesubstrate 902. The second surface may be opposite from the first surface of theabsorption region 906. The n-dopedregion 1030 may be formed by implantation of dopants into theabsorption region 906, or may be formed by diffusing the dopants from the n-well 1032. The configuration of thephotodiode 1010 in which the p-dopedregion 1031 and the n-dopedregion 1030 are vertically separated within theabsorption region 906 may be referred to as a vertical PIN photodiode. - The n-well 1032 is an n-doped region formed in the
substrate 902. The n-well 1032 may be formed by implantation of dopants into thesubstrate 902. In general, the n-well 1032 is used to collect photo-generated carriers generated by theabsorption region 906. In some implementations, a voltage may be applied between the p-dopedregion 1031 and the n-well 1032 to increase the electric field inside theabsorption region 906 for drifting the electrons towards the n-well 1032. - Photo-generated carriers such as electrons generated by the
absorption region 906 may be repelled by the p-dopedregion 1031 toward the heterojunction interface between theabsorption region 906 and thesilicon substrate 902. The n-dopedregion 1030 and the n-well 1032 are configured to align the fermi levels of theabsorption region 906 and thesilicon substrate 902 such that the photo-generated carriers may flow across the heterojunction. In general, a first doping concentration of the n-dopedregion 1030 may be less than or substantially equal to a second doping concentration of the n-well 1032. Such doping concentrations may lead to a reduction of misalignment between the fermi levels across the heterojunction. In case where theabsorption region 906 is an intrinsic germanium layer, the n-dopedregion 1030 may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to G*10{circumflex over ( )}P cm−3, and the n-well 1032 may be doped with phosphorous at a concentration substantially equal to 16*G*10{circumflex over ( )}P cm−3 to substantially align the fermi levels across the heterojunction. - In some implementations, the n-doped
region 1030 and the n-well 1032 are adjacent to each other (e.g., in direct contact without intervening layers). In some other implementations, an intervening layer (e.g., a silicon-germanium layer) may be present between the n-dopedregion 1030 and the n-well 1032. - Once the photo-generated carriers generated by the
absorption region 906 have crossed the heterojunction and have been collected by the n-well 1032, the photo-generated carriers may then be transported to a readout region of thephotodiode 1010, such as then+ Si region 714, under the control of thegate 710. A readout region generally refers to a region of a photodiode where the photo-generated carriers generated by the photodiode may be collected, or read-out, by a circuit such as thereadout circuit 734. Examples of the readout regions includen+ Si regions p+ Si regions 812, and 814. Thereadout circuit 734 is coupled to the readout region to read-out the photo-generated carriers generated by thephotodiode 1010. - The
gate 710 is formed over a surface of thesubstrate 902. For example, a dielectric layer may be present between thesubstrate 902 and thegate 710 and provide support to thegate 710. As such, thegate 710 is supported by thesubstrate 902. The readout region (e.g., n+ Si region 714) is formed on the surface of thesubstrate 902, and is thereby supported by thesubstrate 902. - In some implementations, a capacitor may be coupled to the readout region of the
photodiode 1010. Examples of the capacitors include floating-diffusion capacitors, metal-oxide-metal (MOM) capacitors, metal-insulator-metal (MIM) capacitors, and metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) capacitors. In some implementations, a floating-diffusion capacitor may be integrally formed in the readout region. For example, the n+Si region 714 may implement a floating-diffusion capacitor, which may simultaneously function as a channel terminal for theMOSFET 1040, as a capacitor for storing photo-generated carriers, and as a readout region. The capacitor coupled to the readout region may integrate the photo-generated carriers generated by theabsorption region 906, which may be read-out by thereadout circuit 734. - The n-well 1032, the
gate 710, and then+ Si region 714 may form a metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) 1040 that controls a flow of current between the n-well 1032 and then+ Si region 714. Thesubstrate 902 may be a P-type silicon substrate, and a portion of thesubstrate 902 located under thegate 710 may act as a channel of theMOSFET 1040. A portion of the n-well 1032 that is proximal or underneath thegate 710, or the entire n-well 1032, may be referred to as a channel terminal (e.g., first channel terminal) of theMOSFET 1040. A portion of the n+Si region 714 that is proximal or underneath thegate 710, or the entire n+ Siregion 714, may be referred to as a channel terminal (e.g., second channel terminal) of theMOSFET 1040. The first and second channel terminals may also be referred to as source and drain terminal of theMOSFET 1040. Additional description associated with operation of a MOSFET will be provided in relation toFIG. 24A . - While the
photodiode 1010 described has asingle gate 710, additional gates may be provided. For example, thegate 708, thecontrol signal 722, then+ Si region 712, and thereadout circuit 724 ofFIG. 7 may be implemented in thephotodiode 1010 to implementmulti-gate photodiode 1010 that operates in a manner analogous to themulti-gate photodiode 700 ofFIG. 7 . - Referring to
FIG. 10C , anexample photodiode 1012 with reduced built-in potential is shown. Thephotodiode 1012 is similar to thephotodiode 1010 ofFIG. 10B , but differs in that theabsorption region 906 is now partially embedded in a recess formed on thesubstrate 902, and the photodiode 1020 further includes thespacers 912. The n-well 1032 surrounds at least a portion of the recess, thereby surrounding at least a portion of theabsorption region 906. In some implementations, the n-well 1032 fully surrounds the embedded portion of theabsorption region 906. - The photo-generated carriers may travel downward through the heterojunction formed between the
absorption region 906 and thesilicon substrate 902. The photo-generated carriers may then be guided by the n-well 1032 toward thegate 710 such that the transport of the photo-generated carriers between the n-well 1032 and the n-dopedregion 714 may be controlled by thegate 710. - The
spacers 912 may be electrically insulating (e.g., SiO2), semiconducting (e.g., undoped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon), or conducting (e.g., doped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon). While thephotodiode 1012 described includes thespacers 912, in some implementations, thespacers 912 may be omitted. - While the
photodiode 1012 described has asingle gate 710, additional gates may be provided. For example, thegate 708, thecontrol signal 722, then+ Si region 712, and thereadout circuit 724 ofFIG. 7 may be implemented in thephotodiode 1012 to implement amulti-gate photodiode 1012 that operates in a manner analogous to themulti-gate photodiode 700 ofFIG. 7 . - Referring to
FIG. 10D , anexample photodiode 1014 with reduced built-in potential is shown. Thephotodiode 1014 is similar to thephotodiode 1012 ofFIG. 10C , but differs in that theabsorption region 906 is now fully embedded in the recess formed on thesubstrate 902. The n-well 1032 surrounds at least a portion of the recess, thereby surrounding at least a portion of theabsorption region 906. In some implementations, the n-well 1032 fully surrounds the embedded portion of theabsorption region 906. - The p-doped
region 1031 is in contact with (e.g., adjacent) to the n-dopedregion 1030. The photo-generated carriers may travel laterally through the heterojunction formed between theabsorption region 906 and thesilicon substrate 902 to be collected by the n-well 1032. The transport of carriers collected by the n-well 1032 between the n-well 1032 and the n-dopedregion 714 may be controlled by thegate 710. - The
spacers 912 may be semiconducting (e.g., undoped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon), or conducting (e.g., doped amorphous, poly, or crystalline silicon). While thephotodiode 1014 described includes thespacers 912, in some implementations, thespacers 912 may be omitted. - While the p-doped
region 1031 and the n-dopedregion 1030 is shown to be adjacent to each other, in some implementations, the p-dopedregion 1031 and the n-dopedregion 1030 may be vertically separated. - While the n-doped
region 1030 is shown to not extend across the lateral extents of theabsorption region 906, in some implementations, the n-dopedregion 1030 may fully extend across the lateral extents of theabsorption region 906. - While the
photodiode 1014 described has asingle gate 710, additional gates may be provided. For example, thegate 708, thecontrol signal 722, then+ Si region 712, and thereadout circuit 724 ofFIG. 7 may be implemented in thephotodiode 1014 to implement amulti-gate photodiode 1014 that operates in a manner analogous to themulti-gate photodiode 700 ofFIG. 7 . - While photodiodes having p-doped
region 1031, and n-dopedregions n+ Si region 714 have been described in relation toFIGS. 10B through 10D , the doping polarity may be reversed in some implementations and operate in an analogous manner. - While the
gate 710 for controlling the transport of carriers between theabsorption region 906 and thereadout region 714 have been described in relation toFIGS. 10B through 10D , other control mechanisms have been contemplated. For example, thegate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped base terminal to form an NPN bipolar junction transistor in place of theMOSFET 1040 to control a flow of carriers to the readout region. As another example, thegate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped gate terminal and an n-doped channel to form an N-channel junction field effect transistor (JFET) in place of theMOSFET 1040. - Fermi-level alignment between the
absorption region 906 and thesilicon substrate 902 is one of the considerations in improving the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to the readout region of a photodiode. Now, additional considerations and techniques for improving the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to capacitors associated with the photodiode will be described. - Referring to
FIG. 11A , anexample photodiode 1100 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1100 is similar to thephotodiode 1014 ofFIG. 10D , but differs in that the n-well 1032 has been replaced with a second n-dopedregion 1132, and the first n-dopedregion 1030 and the second n-dopedregion 1132 is coupled with aninterconnect 1150. Additionally, both the p-dopedregion 1031 and the first n-dopedregion 1030 are arranged on the first surface of theabsorption region 906 away from thesubstrate 902, which may be referred as a lateral PIN photodiode. Further, then+ Si region 714 is now regarded as a floating-diffusion capacitor 1140. The floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 is an n-doped region formed within thesilicon substrate 902. The PN junction formed between the n-doped region of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 and the P-type silicon substrate 902 further confines carriers to the n-doped region of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140, improving the storage of carriers by the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140, relative to the case where thesilicon substrate 902 is not doped with P-type dopants. - The first n-doped
region 1030 has a first doping concentration n1. The second n-dopedregion 1132 has a second doping concentration n2. Different from the n-well 1032, the second n-dopedregion 1132 is not adjacent to the first n-dopedregion 1030. For example, the second n-doped region does not physically contact the first n-dopedregion 1030. The floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 has a third doping concentration n3. - The
interconnect 1150 provides an electrical coupling between the first n-dopedregion 1030 and the second n-dopedregion 1132. The electrical coupling provided by theinterconnect 1150 allows the photo-generated carriers generated in the absorption region and received by the first n-dopedregion 1030 to be transported to the second n-dopedregion 1132 without physical contact or adjacency between the two n-doped regions. Theinterconnect 1150 may be formed using various metals, such as aluminum, copper, and tungsten, and may include a contact metal at the interface to the first n-dopedregion 1030 and the second n-dopedregion 1132. - The general operation of the
photodiode 1100 is as follows. Photo-generated carriers such as electrons generated by theabsorption region 906 may be repelled by the p-dopedregion 1031 toward the first n-dopedregion 1030. Once the photo-generated carriers reach the first n-dopedregion 1030, additional force may be imparted on the carriers to induce a flow of those carriers from the first n-dopedregion 1030 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when theMOSFET 1040 is turned on. Such force may be generated by engineering of the doping concentrations n1 of the first n-dopedregion 1030, n2 of the second n-dopedregion 1132, and n3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140. In general, a charge carrier is driven from a region of low doping concentration to a region of high doping concentration, as the potential energy associated with a region of lower doping concentration is higher than the potential energy associated with a region of higher doping concentration. As such, by setting the doping concentrations according to an inequality n3>n2>n1, the carriers stored at the first n-dopedregion 1030 may be first driven toward the second n-dopedregion 1132 having the second doping concentration n2 higher than the first doping concentration n1. Then, when theMOSFET 1040 is turned on, the difference in doping concentration n2 of the second n-dopedregion 1132 and n3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 further drives the carriers toward the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140. As a result, the carrier transfer efficiency from theabsorption region 906 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 may be improved. - Referring to
FIG. 11B , anexample photodiode 1102 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1102 is similar to thephotodiode 1100 ofFIG. 11A , but differs in that the first n-dopedregion 1030 has been extended to a right lateral edge of theabsorption region 906, and the second n-dopedregion 1132 has been extended to the right lateral edge of theabsorption region 906, such that the n-dopedregions absorption region 906 and thesubstrate 902. The adjacency between the n-dopedregions interconnect 1150 ofFIG. 11A . - Referring to
FIG. 11C , anexample photodiode 1104 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1104 is similar to thephotodiode 1102 ofFIG. 11B , but differs in that the second n-dopedregion 1132 is now a second n-dopedregion 1133 that surrounds theabsorption region 906, andisolation structures 1150 have been added. The second n-dopedregion 1133 is similar to the second n-dopedregion 1132, but differs in that the second n-dopedregion 1133 surrounds the embedded portion of theabsorption region 906. The second n-dopedregion 1133 may be formed by etching a recess into thesubstrate 902, defining an implantation mask that opens the region surrounding the recess, and implanting N-type dopants into the recess to form the second n-doped region that surrounds the recess. The second n-dopedregion 1133 ofFIG. 11C may have a relaxed alignment tolerance relative to the second n-dopedregion 1132 ofFIG. 11B , as the configuration ofFIG. 11C ensures that any portion of thesilicon substrate 902 coming in contact with the first n-dopedregion 1030 is doped as the second n-dopedregion 1133 without relying on a precise lateral alignment of the second n-dopedregion 1133 to the interface between theabsorption region 906 and thesubstrate 902. - The
isolation structures 1150 may increase the electrical isolation between thephotodiode 1104 and other electrical components that may be present on thesubstrate 902, such asother photodiodes 1104. Theisolation structure 1150 extends from an upper surface of thesubstrate 902 and into a predetermined depth from the upper surface. In some implementations, theisolation structure 1150 is a doped region that has been doped with P-type dopants or N-type dopants. The doping of theisolation structure 1150 may create a bandgap offset-induced potential energy barrier that impedes a flow of current across theisolation structure 1150, improving electrical isolation between thephotodiode 1104 and surrounding components. In some implementations, theisolation structure 1150 is a trench filled with a semiconductor material that is different from thesubstrate 902. An interface between two different semiconductors formed between thesubstrate 902 and theisolation structure 1150 may create a bandgap offset-induced energy barrier that impedes a flow of current across theisolation structure 1150, improving electrical isolation between thephotodiode 1104 and surrounding components. In some implementations, theisolation structure 1150 is a trench filled with a dielectric or an insulator. Theisolation structure 1150 filled with a low conductivity dielectric or insulator may provide a region of high electrical resistance, impeding a flow of current across theisolation structure 1150, improving electrical isolation between thephotodiode 1104 and surrounding components. - Referring to
FIG. 11D , anexample photodiode 1106 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1106 is similar to thephotodiode 1104 ofFIG. 11C , but differs in that thespacers 912 ofFIG. 9B have been added, and the first n-dopedregion 1030 has moved to the bottom surface of theabsorption region 906 that interfaces with thesubstrate 902. The p-dopedregion 1031 and the first n-dopedregion 1030 forms a vertical PIN diode. Thespacers 912 may provide electrical isolation along the vertical sidewalls of theabsorption region 906 from thesilicon substrate 902, and confines the flow of the photo-generated carriers in a vertical direction along theabsorption region 906. The photo-generated carriers are collected by the second n-dopedregion 1133 at the bottom interface between theabsorption region 906 and thesubstrate 902, which are in turn driven towards the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when theMOSFET 1040 is turned on. In some implementations, thefirst doping region 1030 may be formed by diffusing the dopants of the second doping region 1333 into the absorption region 906 (e.g., through thermal processing). Because the diffusion-based formation of theregion 1030 removes a dopant implantation step, thephotodiode 1106 may be simpler to fabricate compared to thephotodiode 1104 ofFIG. 11C . -
Photodiodes region 1030, the second n-dopedregions diffusion capacitor 1140 to drive the transfer of photo-generated carriers from the absorption region to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 when theMOSFET 1040 is turned on. Another technique for improving the carrier transfer is by utilizing a charge sharing effect across capacitances associated with different doped regions. Referring toFIG. 11E , anexample photodiode 1108 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1108 is similar to thephotodiode 1100 ofFIG. 11A , but differs in that the first n-dopedregion 1030 is now a first n-dopedregion 1130, the second n-dopedregion 1132 is now a second n-dopedregion 1134, and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 is now a floating-diffusion capacitor 1142. The floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 has a capacitance substantially larger than respective capacitances associated with the first n-dopedregion 1130 and the second n-dopedregion 1134. - In this configuration, a fourth doping concentration n4 of the first n-doped
region 1130, a fifth doping concentration n5 of the second n-dopedregion 1134, and a sixth doping concentration n6 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 may be high (e.g., greater than 5*1019 cm−3) and substantially similar (e.g., within 1%, within 5%, within 10%, or within 20% of a value X). For example, n4, n5, and n6 may be substantially equal to 1*1020 cm−3. A high doping concentration reduces the metal-semiconductor contact resistance, which is turn decreases the associated RC time constant of charge sharing, resulting in a faster carrier transfer. - By increasing the size of the n-doped region of the floating-
diffusion capacitor 1142 relative to the size of the n-dopedregions diffusion capacitor 1142 can be made to be substantially larger than that of the n-dopedregions region 1130, the second n-dopedregion 1134, and the n-doped region forming the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142, may form PN junctions with the surrounding material, such as theabsorption region 906 or thesubstrate 902. Such PN junctions contribute junction capacitances, which further increase the capacitances associated with the first n-dopedregion 1130, the second n-dopedregion 1134, and the n-doped region forming the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142. The junction capacitances may depend on various factors including the physical sizes and the doping concentrations of the doped regions. - The capacitances of the first n-doped
region 1130, the second n-dopedregion 1134, and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 are electrically coupled in parallel when theMOSFET 1040 is turned on. When capacitors are coupled in parallel, the capacitors share a common voltage across its terminals through a process referred to as charge sharing. The voltage V across a capacitor is defined by the amount of charge stored by the capacitor in an equation V=Q/C, where Q is the amount of charge stored by a capacitor, and C is the capacitance of the capacitor. As such, when parallel capacitors share a same voltage V1, the charge Q stored by an individual capacitor is given by relation Q=V1*C. Therefore, by designing the first and second n-dopedregions diffusion capacitor 1142 such that the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 is substantially larger than the capacitances of the n-dopedregions diffusion capacitor 1142 can be made to be substantially larger than the charge stored by the n-dopedregions absorption region 906 to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142. For example, the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 may be at least 10 times larger (e.g., 20 times larger, 40 times larger, or 50 times larger) than a combined capacitance of the first n-dopedregion 1130 and the second n-dopedregion 1134. - In some implementations, the doping engineering described in relation to
FIGS. 11A-11D may be implemented in combination with the charge-sharing technique ofFIG. 11E . For example, the doping concentrations may be set to satisfy the inequality n4<n5<n6, while simultaneously ensuring that the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 is substantially larger than the combined capacitances of the n-dopedregions - In some implementations, instead of increasing the size of floating-
diffusion capacitor 1142 relative to the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 to increase the capacitance associated with the readout region of thephotodiode 1108, the capacitance associated with the readout region may be increased by coupling a separate capacitor such as a metal-oxide-metal (MOM) capacitor, a metal-insulator-metal (MIM) capacitor, or a metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) capacitor. The added capacitance by the separate capacitor may provide benefits analogous to the increasing of the capacitance of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142. In some implementations, the separate capacitor may be coupled to the readout region in parallel with the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 to further increase the capacitance of the readout region. - Referring to
FIG. 11F , anexample photodiode 1109 with improved carrier transfer is shown. Thephotodiode 1109 is similar to thephotodiode 1100 ofFIG. 11A , but differs in that theMOSFET 1040 is now supported by theabsorption region 906. The relocation of theMOSFET 1040 to be supported entirely within theabsorption region 906 eliminates a need for the second n-dopedregion 1132 formed on thesilicon substrate 902 and theinterconnect 1150 that coupled the second n-dopedregion 1132 to the first n-dopedregion 1030. In this configuration, the photo-generated carriers generated within theabsorption region 906 does not flow from theabsorption region 906 to thesubstrate 902. Instead, the photo-generated carriers flow directly from theabsorption region 906 to thereadout circuit 734 under control of thegate 710. As such, the photo-generated carriers do not experience a built-in potential across theabsorption region 906 and thesubstrate 902. In addition, the difference between the first doping concentration n1 of the first n-dopedregion 1030 and the third doping concentration n3 of the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 may improve carrier transfer between the first n-dopedregion 1030 and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140. - In some implementations, a capacitor may be coupled to the readout region of the
photodiode 1109, such as the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140. Examples of the capacitors include MOM, MIM, and MOS capacitors. - While photodiodes having p-doped
region 1031, n-dopedregions diffusion capacitors FIGS. 11A through 11F , the doping polarity may be reversed in some implementations and operate in an analogous manner. - While the
gate 710 for controlling the transport of carriers between theabsorption region 906 and thereadout region FIGS. 11A through 11F , other control mechanisms have been contemplated. For example, thegate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped base terminal to form an NPN bipolar junction transistor in place of theMOSFET 1040 to control a flow of carriers to the readout region. As another example, thegate 710 may be replaced with a p-doped gate terminal and an n-doped channel to form an N-channel junction field effect transistor (JFET) in place of theMOSFET 1040. -
Photodiodes FIGS. 11A through 11F are fabricated on thesubstrate 902, and hence supported bysubstrate 902. In general, various components of the photodiodes may be separately fabricated on different semiconductor wafers, and be bonded to each other using various wafer bonding techniques to form a photodiode. Referring toFIG. 11G , a wafer-bondedphotodiode 1160 is shown. The wafer-bondedphotodiode 1160 is similar to thephotodiode 1100 ofFIG. 11A , but differs in that theabsorption region 906, the p-dopedregion 1031, and the first n-dopedregion 1030 are now supported by afirst semiconductor layer 1170, and the second n-dopedregion 1132, thegate 710, and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1140 are now supported by asecond semiconductor layer 1172. Thefirst semiconductor layer 1170 and thesecond semiconductor layer 1172 may be semiconductor wafers, such as a silicon wafer used in standard integrated circuit fabrication processes. The operation of thephotodiode 1160 is analogous to the operation of thephotodiode 1100. - The
first semiconductor layer 1170 may be separately processed from thesecond semiconductor layer 1172. For example, thefirst semiconductor layer 1170 may be processed using a first fabrication process specialized for formingabsorption region 906, and thesecond semiconductor layer 1172 may be processed using a second fabrication process specialized for forming thegate 710. The second fabrication process may be, for example, asub 100 nm CMOS fabrication process for forming high-density digital circuits. A first portion of theinterconnect 1150 may be fabricated during the processing of thefirst semiconductor layer 1170, and a second portion of theinterconnect 1150 may be fabricated during the processing of thesecond semiconductor layer 1172. The processed first andsecond semiconductor layers bonding interface 1174, mechanically coupling the first andsecond semiconductor layers absorption region 906 to the second n-dopedregion 1132. The entity that results from bonding of the first andsecond layers FIGS. 17A-17D andFIGS. 19A through 20F . - The bonding of the first and
semiconductor layers absorption region 906 facing thesecond semiconductor layer 1172. As such, anoptical signal 1180 may enter theabsorption region 906 from a second surface of thefirst semiconductor layer 1170 opposite to the surface where theabsorption region 906 is formed. This illumination configuration may be referred to as back-side illumination. - Referring to
FIG. 11H , a wafer-bondedphotodiode 1162 is shown. The wafer-bondedphotodiode 1162 is similar to thephotodiode 1108 ofFIG. 11E , but differs in that theabsorption region 906, the p-dopedregion 1031, and the first n-dopedregion 1130 are now supported by thefirst semiconductor layer 1170, and the second n-dopedregion 1134, thegate 710, and the floating-diffusion capacitor 1142 are now supported by thesecond semiconductor layer 1172. The fabrication process of thephotodiode 1162 is similar to the fabrication process of thephotodiode 1160, and the operation of thephotodiode 1162 is analogous to the operation of thephotodiode 1108. -
FIG. 12 illustratesexample photodiodes 1200 for detecting visible and infrared optical signals. Theexample photodiodes 1200 includes anNIR pixel 1202 for collecting holes and avisible pixel 1204 for collecting electrons, where theNIR pixel 1202 and thevisible pixel 1204 are formed on a common substrate. TheNIR pixel 1202 and thevisible pixel 1204 are not separated by an isolation structure. TheNIR pixel 1202 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the NIR range. Thevisible pixel 1204 is configured to detect an optical signal having a wavelength in the visible range (e.g., blue and/or green and/or red). TheNIR pixel 1202 and thevisible pixel 1204 may be photodiodes in thesensor layer 108 as described in reference toFIG. 1 , for example. - The
visible pixel 1204 is configured to collect free electrons generated from photo-generated carriers, and includes an n-Si region 1212, ann+ Si region 1214, an p-Si region 1220, afirst gate 1216, afirst control signal 1217 coupled to thefirst gate 1216, and afirst readout circuit 1218 coupled to then+ Si region 1214. The n-Si region 1212 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with phosphorus. Then+ Si region 1214 may have an n+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with phosphorous. The p-Si region 1220 may be lightly doped with a p-dopant, e.g., about 1016 cm−3 with boron. - In general, the p-
Si layer 1220 receives anoptical signal 1222. Since the thickness of the p-Si layer 1220 is generally thin (e.g., 50-100 nm), theoptical signal 1222 propagates into the n-Si region 1212, where the n-Si region 1212 absorbs theoptical signal 1222 and converts theoptical signal 1222 into free carriers. In some implementations, theoptical signal 1222 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as a filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 1222 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In general, a difference between the Fermi level of the p-
Si region 1220 and the Fermi level of the n-Si region 1212 creates an electric field between the two regions, where free electrons generated by the n-Si region 1212 are drifted towards the region below the p-Si region 1220 by the electric field. Thefirst gate 1216 may be coupled to thefirst control signal 1217. For example, thefirst gate 1216 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thefirst control signal 1217 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thefirst control signal 1217 controls a flow of free electrons from the region below the p-Si region 1220 to then+ Si region 1214. For example, if a voltage of thecontrol signal 1217 exceeds a threshold voltage, free electrons accumulated in the region below the p-Si region 1220 will drift to then+ Si region 1214 for collection. Then+ Si region 1214 may be coupled to thefirst readout circuit 1218 that processes the collected electrical signal. Thefirst readout circuit 1218 may be similar to thefirst readout circuit 418 as described in reference toFIG. 4A . - The
NIR pixel 1202 is configured to collect free holes generated from photo-generated carriers, and includes an n-Si region 1242, ap+ Si region 1244, asecond gate 1246, asecond control signal 1247 coupled to thesecond gate 1246, asecond readout circuit 1248 coupled to thep+ Si region 1244, an+ GeSi region 1250, anintrinsic GeSi region 1252, a p-Ge region 1254, and anoxide region 1256. In addition, theNIR pixel 1202 shares the p-Si region 1220 with the VISpixel 1204. - The n-
Si region 1242 may be lightly doped with an n-dopant, e.g., about 1015 cm−3 with phosphorus. Thep+ Si region 1244 may have an p+ doping, where the activated dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 with boron. Then+ GeSi region 1250 receives anoptical signal 1260 and converts theoptical signal 1260 into electrical signals. Since the thickness of then+ GeSi layer 1250 is generally thin (e.g., 50-100 nm), theoptical signal 1260 propagates into theintrinsic GeSi region 1252, where theintrinsic GeSi region 1252 absorbs theoptical signal 1260 and converts theoptical signal 1260 into free carriers. In some implementations, theoptical signal 1260 may be filtered by a wavelength filter not shown in this figure, such as an NIR filter in thefilter layer 110 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . In some implementations, a beam profile of theoptical signal 1260 may be shaped by a lens not shown in this figure, such as a lens in thelens layer 112 as described in reference toFIG. 1 . - In some implementations, a thickness of the
intrinsic GeSi region 1252 may be between 0.05 μm to 2 μm. In some implementations, then+ GeSi region 1250 may repel the holes generated away from from theintrinsic GeSi region 1252 to avoid surface recombination and thereby may increase the carrier collection efficiency. For example, then+ GeSi region 1250 may have a n+ doping, where the dopant concentration is as high as a fabrication process may achieve, e.g., about 5×1020 cm−3 when theintrinsic GeSi region 1250 is germanium and doped with phosphorus. - The photo-generated free holes in the
intrinsic GeSi region 1252 may drift or diffuse into the p-Si region 1220. The photo-generated free electrons in theintrinsic GeSi region 1252 may be repelled by the p-GeSi region 1254, which prevents the free electrons from entering the p-Si region 1220. In some implementations, a drain supply voltage VDD may be applied to theNIR pixel 1202 to create an electric field between then+ GeSi region 1250 and the p-Si region 1220, such that the free holes may drift towards the p-Si region 1220 while the free electrons may drift towards then+ GeSi region 1250. - The
second gate 1246 may be coupled to thesecond control signal 1247. For example, thesecond gate 1246 may be coupled to a voltage source, where thesecond control signal 1247 may be a DC voltage signal from the voltage source. Thesecond control signal 1247 controls a flow of free holes from the p-Si region 1220 to thep+ Si region 1244. For example, if a voltage of thesecond control signal 1247 exceeds a threshold voltage, free holes accumulated in the p-Si region 1220 will drift towards thep+ Si region 1244. Thep+ Si region 1244 may be coupled to thesecond readout circuit 1248 for further processing of the collected electrical signal. - Although not shown in
FIG. 12 , in some other implementations, thevisible pixel 1204 may alternatively be fabricated to collect holes instead of electrons and theNIR pixel 1202 may alternatively be fabricated to collect electrons instead of holes. In this case, the p-Si region 1220 would be replaced by an n-Si region, the n-Si regions p+ Si region 1244 would be replaced by an n+ Si region, then+ Si region 1214 would be replaced by a p+ Si region, then+ GeSi region 1250 would be replaced by a p+ GeSi region, and the p-GeSi region 1254 would be replaced by an n-GeSi region. - In some implementations, the direction of light signal shown in
FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 may be reversed depending on designs, packaging, and applications. For example, referring toFIG. 4A , theoptical signal 406 may enter theNIR pixel 402 through thep+ Si region 423, propagate through the n-Si region 422, and then be absorbed by theintrinsic GeSi region 433. -
FIG. 13 shows a top view of an example integratedphotodiode array 1300 for detecting visible and NIR light as well as for a TOF application. Thephotodiode array 1300 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1302 and a VISpixel 1304. The NIR/TOF pixel 1302 includes anNIR gate 1306, afirst TOF gate 1312, and asecond TOF gate 1314. The VISpixel 1304 includes a VISgate 1308. The NIR/TOF pixel 1302 and the VISpixel 1304 are not isolated by an isolation structure. The controls of the charge readout using theNIR gate 1306 and the VISgate 1308 are similar to themulti-gate photodiode 1200 as described in reference toFIG. 12 . The controls of the charge readout using theTOF gates multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference toFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference toFIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . The readout circuits coupled to theNIR gate 1306 and theTOF gates NIR gate 1306 and theTOF gates gate 1308 would be configured to collect holes. Conversely, if the readout circuits of theNIR gate 1306 and theTOF gates gate 1308 would be configured to collect electrons. -
FIG. 14 shows a top view of an example integratedphotodiode array 1400 for detecting visible light and for a TOF application. Thephotodiode array 1400 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1402 and a VISpixel 1404. The NIR/TOF pixel 1402 includes afirst TOF gate 1412, and asecond TOF gate 1414. The VISpixel 1404 includes a VISgate 1408. The NIR/TOF pixel 1402 and the VISpixel 1404 are not isolated by an isolation structure. The controls of the charge readout using the VISgate 1408 and theTOF gate multi-gate photodiode 1200 as described in reference toFIG. 12 . The controls of the charge readout using theTOF gates multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference toFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference toFIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . The readout circuits coupled to theTOF gates gate 1408 would collect the opposite type of carriers. For example, if the readout circuits of theTOF gates gate 1408 would be configured to collect holes. Conversely, if the readout circuits of theTOF gates gate 1408 would be configured to collect electrons. -
FIG. 15 shows a top view of an example integratedphotodiode array 1500 for detecting visible and NIR light as well as for a TOF application. Thephotodiode array 1500 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and a VISpixel 1504. The NIR/TOF pixel 1502 includes anNIR gate 1506, afirst TOF gate 1512, and asecond TOF gate 1514. The VISpixel 1504 includes a VISgate 1508. The NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and the VISpixel 1504 are isolated by an isolation structure. The controls of the charge readout using theNIR gate 1506 and the VISgate 1508 are similar to thephotodiodes 400 as described in reference toFIG. 4A , or thephotodiodes 450 as described in reference toFIG. 4B , or thephotodiodes 500 as described in reference toFIG. 5 , or thephotodiodes 600 as described in reference toFIG. 6 . The controls of the charge readout using theNIR gate 1506 are similar to thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . The controls of the charge readout using theTOF gates multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference toFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference toFIG. 8 , or the multi-gate versions of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . The readout circuits coupled to theNIR gate 1506 and theTOF gates gate 1508 may or may not collect the same type of carriers. For example, if the readout circuits of theNIR gate 1506 and theTOF gates gate 1508 may be configured to collect holes or electrons depending on the design because the NIR/TOF pixel 1502 and the VISpixel 1504 are isolated. Similarly, if the readout circuits of theNIR gate 1506 and theTOF gates gate 1508 may be configured to collect holes or electrons. -
FIG. 16 shows a top view of an example integratedphotodiode array 1600 for detecting visible light as well as for a TOF application. Thephotodiode array 1600 includes a NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and a VISpixel 1604. The NIR/TOF pixel 1602 includes afirst TOF gate 1606, asecond TOF gate 1612, athird TOF gate 1614, and afourth TOF gate 1616. The four TOF gates may be used to extract additional phase information about the collected signal. The VISpixel 1604 includes a VISgate 1608. The NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and the VISpixel 1604 are isolated by an isolation structure. The controls of the charge readout using the VISgate 1608 and theTOF gate photodiodes 400 as described in reference toFIG. 4A , or thephotodiodes 450 as described in reference toFIG. 4B , or thephotodiodes 500 as described in reference toFIG. 5 , or thephotodiodes 600 as described in reference toFIG. 6 . The controls of the charge readout using theTOF gates multi-gate photodiode 700 as described in reference toFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 as described in reference toFIG. 8 , or the multi-gate versions of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . The readout circuits coupled to theTOF gates gate 1608 may or may not collect the same type of carriers. For example, if the readout circuits of theTOF gates gate 1608 may be configured to collect holes or electrons depending on the design because the NIR/TOF pixel 1602 and the VISpixel 1604 are isolated. Similarly, if the readout circuits of theTOF gates gate 1608 may be configured to collect holes or electrons. -
FIGS. 17A-17D illustrate anexample design 1700 for fabricating a photodiode array. Referring toFIG. 17A , a germanium-silicon layer 1702 was formed on adonor wafer 1704. Thedonor wafer 1704 may be a silicon wafer. The germanium-silicon layer 1702 may be formed using epitaxial growth through chemical vapor deposition (CVD) system. - Referring to
FIG. 17B , theisolation structures 1708 are formed in the germanium-silicon layer 1702 to define the photodiode regions. Theisolation structures 1708 may be formed through dry-etch of the isolation structure patterns followed by a deposition of insulating materials such as oxide, or by implantations to form a doping junction, or any other suitable techniques. Although not shown in the figure, there may be one or more processing steps that further process the photodiodes. For example, there may be a doping step to define a p+ GeSi region on the surface of an intrinsic GeSi region. Aninterconnect layer 1706 is then formed on the germanium-silicon layer 1702, where multiple interconnects are formed in a dielectric layer to establish electrical connections with the germanium-silicon layer 1702, and where alignment marks for bonding alignment are formed. - Referring to
FIG. 17C , aninterconnect layer 1716 of acarrier substrate 1714 is bonded with theinterconnect layer 1706 of thedonor wafer 1704. Note that the interconnect layer referred herein may include conductive electrical path (e.g. metallic layer) and dielectric layer to isolate individual conductive electrical path. Thecarrier substrate 1714 may be a silicon substrate, where one ormore layers 1718 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate. The circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array. Alignment marks may be formed in both thelayers layers - Referred to
FIG. 17D , afilter layer 1720 and alens layer 1722 are formed on the germanium-silicon layer 1702 to form the photodiode array. Although not shown, thedonor wafer 1704 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming thefilter layer 1720. In some other implementations, although not shown in these figures, germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related toFIGS. 17A-17D . -
FIGS. 18A-18D illustrate anexample design 1800 for selectively forming germanium-silicon on a substrate. Thedesign 1800 may be used to fabricate thephotodiode array FIG. 18A , arecess 1804 is formed on asubstrate 1802. Therecess 1804 may define the photodiode area for an NIR pixel. The recess may be formed using lithography followed by a dry etching of thesubstrate 1802. The shape of the recess may correspond to the shape of the pixel, such as a square, a circle, or other suitable shapes. - Referring to
FIG. 18B , a dielectric layer may be deposited over the substrate, and a directional etch may be performed to form asidewall spacer 1806. The directional etch may be an anisotropic dry etch. Referring toFIG. 18C , a germanium-silicon region 1808 is selectively grown from thesubstrate 1802. For example, the germanium-silicon region 1808 may be formed using epitaxial growth through chemical vapor deposition (CVD) system. - Referring to
FIG. 18D , the germanium-silicon region 1808 is planarized with thesubstrate 1802. The germanium-silicon region 1808 may be planarized using chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) or any other suitable techniques. In some other implementations, although not shown in these figures, germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related toFIGS. 18A-18D . In some implementations, thesidewall spacers 1806 may be omitted. -
FIGS. 19A-19D illustrate anexample design 1900 for fabricating a photodiode array. Thedesign 1900 may be used to fabricate thephotodiodes FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10B-10D, 11A-11H, and 12 , for example. Referring toFIG. 19A ,silicon photodiodes 1902 are formed on adonor wafer 1904, and a germanium-silicon photodiode 1906 was selectively grown on thedonor wafer 1904. Thevisible pixel 454 may be an example of a diode of thesilicon photodiodes 1902, and theNIR pixel 452 may be an example of a diode of theGeSi photodiodes 1906. The selective growth of germanium-silicon photodiode may be done using thedesign 1800 as described in reference toFIG. 18A-18D or any other suitable designs or processes. - Referring to
FIG. 19B , aninterconnect layer 1910 is formed on the germanium-silicon photodiode 1906, where multiple interconnects are formed in a dielectric layer to establish electrical connections with the germanium-silicon photodiode 1906 and thesilicon photodiodes 1902, and where alignment marks for bonding alignment are formed. - Referring to
FIG. 19C , aninterconnect layer 1916 of acarrier substrate 1914 is bonded with theinterconnect layer 1910 of thedonor wafer 1904. Thecarrier substrate 1914 may be a silicon substrate, where one ormore layers 1918 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate. The circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array. Alignment marks may be formed in both thelayers layers - Referred to
FIG. 19D , afilter layer 1920 and alens layer 1922 are formed on thesilicon photodiode 1902 to form the photodiode array. Although not shown, thedonor wafer 1904 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming thefilter layer 1920. In some other implementations, although not shown in these figures, germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related toFIGS. 19A-19D . -
FIGS. 20A-20E illustrate anexample design 2000 for fabricating a photodiode array. Thedesign 2000 may be used to fabricate thephotodiodes FIGS. 4A, 4B, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10B-10D, 11A-11H, and 12 , for example. Referring toFIG. 20A , a germanium-silicon layer 2002 was formed on afirst donor wafer 2004. Afirst interconnect layer 2006 is formed on the germanium-silicon layer 2002 with multiple interconnects and alignment marks. - Referring to
FIG. 20B , aninterconnect layer 2016 of acarrier substrate 2014 is bonded with theinterconnect layer 2006 of thefirst donor wafer 2004. Thecarrier substrate 2014 may be a silicon substrate, where one ormore layers 2018 of circuitry may be formed on the silicon substrate. The circuitry may be control circuitry, readout circuitry, and/or any other suitable circuitry for the photodiode array. The bonding between thelayers - Referring to
FIG. 20C , thefirst donor wafer 2004 is removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding. Referring toFIG. 20D , a first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020 is formed. The first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020 may be formed using a pattern and an etch of the germanium-silicon layer 2002, followed by a deposition of a passivation layer such as a dielectric layer. The dielectric layer may be planarized through CMP or other suitable techniques. A via 2022 may be formed by an anisotropic etch followed by a deposition of conductive materials such as copper. - Referring to
FIG. 20E , thedielectric layer 2044 of thecarrier substrate 2014 is bonded with aninterconnect layer 2032 of asecond donor wafer 2034. A germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036 are formed on thesecond donor wafer 2034. The via 2038 is bonded with the via 2022 to establish electrical connections between the first germanium-silicon photodiode 2020, the germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036, and theintegrated circuits 2018. - Referred to
FIG. 20F , afilter layer 2040 and alens layer 2042 are formed on the germanium-silicon photodiode array 2036 to form the photodiode array. Although not shown, thesecond donor wafer 2034 may be removed by polishing or other suitable techniques after bonding and before forming thefilter layer 2040. In some other implementations, although not shown in these figures, germanium may replace germanium-silicon as the sensor material in the descriptions related toFIGS. 20A-20F . - Operation speed or bandwidth of a photodetector can be an important performance parameter for applications that benefit from high speed detection of light, such as TOF detection. Among characteristics that can affect bandwidth of a photodetector is the physical size of the photodetector, such as the area of the photodetector through which light is received. Reducing the area of the photodetector, for example, can lead to a reduction in device capacitance, carrier transit time, or a combination of both, which typically results in an increase in photodetector bandwidth. However, a reduction in the detection area of a photodetector can lead to a reduction in the amount of light (i.e., number of photons) detected by the photodetector. For example, for a given intensity of light per unit area, the reduction in the area of the detector leads to a reduction in detected light.
- For applications that benefit from both high bandwidth and high detection efficiency, such as TOF detection, addition of a microlens before the photodetector may be beneficial. The microlens can focus the incident light onto the photodetector, allowing a small-area photodetector to detect light incident over an area larger than itself. For example, a properly designed combination of a microlens and a spacer layer (SL) that separates the microlens from the photodetector by an effective focal length of the microlens can allow focusing of the incident light to a diffraction-limited spot that is on the order of the square of the optical wavelength of the incident light. Such a scheme can allow reduction of photodetector area while mitigating the potential downsides of the photodetector area reduction.
-
FIG. 21A shows a cross-sectional view of anexample configuration 2100 of silicon lenses integrated with photodetectors. Theconfiguration 2100 includes adonor wafer 2110 and acarrier wafer 2130. Thedonor wafer 2110 includesmultiple pixels 2120 a through 2120 c (collectively referred to as pixels 2120), via 2114,metal pad 2116, and afirst bonding layer 2112. Thecarrier wafer 2130 includes asecond bonding layer 2132. Thedonor wafer 2110 and thecarrier wafer 2130 are bonded to each other through thefirst bonding layer 2112 and thesecond bonding layer 2132. Thesubstrate 2110 may be similar tosubstrate 102 ofFIG. 1 . The absorption region 2106 may be similar to theabsorption regions - The
pixels 2120 a through 2120 c includeabsorption regions 2106 a through 2106 c, respectively, andmicrolenses 2122 a through 2122 c (collected referred to as microlenses 2122), respectively. The microlenses 2122 are convex lenses that are integrated into or on thedonor wafer 2110. In applications that benefit from high light collection efficiency, such as TOF detection, addition of microlenses 2122 may be beneficial. The convex configuration of the microlens 2122 can cause light incident on the microlens 2122 to be focused toward the absorption region 2106, which may improve light collection efficiency of the pixels 2120, leading to improved pixel performance. The arrangement of the pixel 2120 with the microlens 2122 on a backside of thedonor wafer 2110 may be referred to as backside illumination. - The microlens 2122 has various characteristics that affect its performance, including geometrical parameters and material from which it is formed. The microlens 2122 is typically implemented in a plano-convex configuration, with one surface facing the incident light and being convex with a radius of curvature, and the other surface being a planar surface interfacing with the
donor wafer 2110 in or on which the microlens 2122 is formed. The plano-convex configuration of the microlens 2122 may lend itself to fabrication through standard semiconductor processing techniques. The microlens 2122 may have a height HL and a diameter DL, and may be separated from a lens-facing surface of the absorption region 2106 by a height HO. In some implementations, HL may range from 1 to 4 μm, HO may range from 8 to 12 μm, HA may range from 1 to 1.5 μm, and DL may range from 5 to 15 μm. In some implementations, for a spherical-type microlens 2122, its radius of curvature may be set such that the focal length of the microlens 2122 is approximately equal to HO to achieve optimal focusing of light onto the absorption region 2106. The determination of the focal length and the radius of curvature may be performed using various simulation techniques such as beam propagation method (BPM) and finite difference time domain (FDTD) technique. In some implementations, the microlens 2122 is an aspheric lens. - The microlens 2122 can be formed from various materials and fabricated in various ways. In general, various materials that are transparent for the wavelengths to be detected by the pixels 2120 may be used. For example, the microlens 2122 may be fabricated from materials having moderate to high index of refraction (e.g., >1.5), such as crystalline silicon, polysilicon, amorphous silicon, silicon nitride, polymer, or combination thereof. For visible wavelengths, polymer materials may be used. For NIR wavelengths, silicon may be used as silicon is relatively transparent in the NIR, and has a relatively high index of refraction (approximately 3.5 at 1000 nm), making it well suited as a lens material in the NIR. Furthermore, as silicon is strongly absorbing in the visible wavelengths (e.g., <800 nm), a silicon microlens may block a substantial portion of visible light from reaching the absorption region 2106, which may be beneficial for applications where selective detection of NIR wavelengths is desired (e.g., ToF detection). A crystalline silicon microlens 2122 may be fabricated by patterning and etching a surface of the
donor wafer 2110, which is typically a crystalline silicon wafer. As another example, polysilicon or amorphous silicon may be deposited on the surface of thedonor wafer 2110, which may then be patterned and etched in similar fashion. The formation of microlens 2122 through etching of the crystallinesilicon donor wafer 2110 or by etching of the polysilicon or amorphous silicon deposited on thedonor wafer 2110 is an example method of integrally forming the microlens 2122 on thedonor wafer 2110. - The patterning of the microlens 2122 may be performed using, for example, grayscale lithography techniques. In grayscale lithography, a feature to be patterned, such as the microlens, is exposed using a local gradation in the exposure dose, which translates into a gradation in the thickness of the resulting photoresist mask that has been developed. For example, the photoresist mask can be patterned to have a similar shape as the microlens 2122. The photoresist mask is then transferred onto the material underneath, such as the crystalline
silicon donor wafer 2110, by semiconductor etching techniques such as plasma-based directional etching techniques, completing the fabrication of the microlens 2122. In some implementations, the local gradation in the exposure dose may be achieved, for example, by varying a fill-factor of sub-wavelength features on a photomask - The absorption regions 2106 may be similar to
absorption region carrier wafer 2130 may include various electronic circuits that are coupled to the pixels 2120. For example, the electronic circuits may be coupled through structures such as the via 2114. The via 2114 may be coupled to ametal pad 2116 to interface with external electronics through, for example, a wire bond. - The
carrier wafer 2130 and thedonor wafer 2110 may be bonded or mechanically attached to one another through various techniques. For example, the first andsecond bonding layers second bonding layers second bonding layers -
FIG. 21B shows a cross-sectional view of anexample configuration 2140 of a microlens integrated with a photodetector. Theconfiguration 2140 includes amicrolens 2142, an anti-reflection coating (ARC)layer 2144, aspacer layer 2146, afirst layer 2148, asecond layer 2150, asilicon layer 2152 and aphotodetector 2154. TheARC layer 2144 is supported by themicrolens 2142. Themicrolens 2142 is supported by thespacer layer 2146. Thephotodetector 2154 may be supported by thesilicon layer 2152 or be formed within thesilicon layer 2152. Thefirst layer 2148 and thesecond layer 2150 may be intermediate layers between thesilicon layer 2152 and thespacer layer 2146. - The
ARC layer 2144 is provided to reduce a reflection of light incident on themicrolens 2142. TheARC layer 2144, for example, may be designed to have a refractive index that is the square root of the index of themicrolens 2142, and have a thickness corresponding to a quarter of the incident wavelength. In some implementations, theARC layer 2144 may be formed from silicon dioxide. In some implementations, theARC layer 2144 may include multiple layers to form a multi-layer ARC. - The
configuration 2140 may correspond to an integration ofmicrolens 2142 in a back-side illuminated (BSI) image sensor configuration. For example, thesilicon layer 2152 can be a silicon substrate, such as thedonor wafer 1904 ofFIG. 19C or thesecond donor wafer 2034 ofFIG. 20E , and thephotodetector 2154 may be, for example, thephotodetectors FIGS. 19A-19D . The interface between thesilicon layer 2152 and thesecond layer 2150 may correspond to the bottom surface of thedonor wafer 1904 opposite to thephotodetector 1906 ofFIGS. 19A-19D . In such a BSI configuration, thesecond layer 2150 formed on thesilicon layer 2152, e.g., the backside of thedonor wafer 1904, can include various structures and layers typical in fabrication of a BSI illuminated sensor wafer. Examples of such structures and layers include an ARC layer for reducing light reflection at the interface of thesilicon layer 2152, and a metal grid, such as a tungsten grid, for blocking light into thesilicon layer 2152 other than regions for receiving light, such as the regions underneath themicrolens 2142. Thefirst layer 2148 may be a thin layer of material that promotes adhesion of thespacer layer 2146 to thesecond layer 2150 for improving, among others, manufacturability and reliability of theconfiguration 2140. The material for thefirst layer 2148 may be, for example, various dielectric materials (e.g., SiO2, SiON, and SiN) or polymers. In some implementation, thefirst layer 2148 can be omitted depending on the interaction between thesecond layer 2150 and the spacer layer 2146 (e.g., in the case where thespacer layer 2146 has good adhesion with the second layer 2150). - The
configuration 2140 may be fabricated by providing a sensor wafer including thesilicon layer 2152, thephotodetector 2154, and thesecond layer 2150, and depositing thefirst layer 2148, thespacer layer 2146, themicrolens 2142, and theARC layer 2144 in the order given, and then patterning and etching to expose metal pads similar to themetal pad 2116 shown inFIG. 21A . Themicrolens 2142 may be patterned and etched using techniques described in relation to fabrication of the microlens 2122 ofFIG. 21A . While theARC layer 2144 is shown to be limited to the surface of themicrolens 2142, in general, theARC layer 2144 may extend to other surfaces, such as the side surface of themicrolens 2142 and the upper surface of thespacer layer 2146. - Various characteristics of the components of a particular implementation of the
configuration 2140 configured for operational wavelength of 940 nm are given as an example. Themicrolens 2142 has a refractive index of 1.53, a radius of curvature of 6 μm, a height of 4 μm, and a diameter DL of 10 μm. TheARC layer 2144 is formed from SiO2, which has a refractive index of 1.46 at 940 nm and a thickness of 161 nm. Thespacer layer 2146 has a refractive index of 1.56, and a thickness of 2 μm. Thefirst layer 2148 has a refractive index 1.54 and a thickness of 8 μm. Thesecond layer 2150 includes an ARC layer for thesilicon layer 2152 and a tungsten grid. While specific characteristics have been provided, the characteristics may be modified to adapt theconfiguration 2140, for example, for different operational wavelengths, materials, and size of thephotodetector 2154. - In some implementations, the
second layer 2150, which may be referred to as the “top layer” formed on top of the backside of a silicon substrate of a BSI image sensor, may be modified to improve the overall optical performance ofconfiguration 2140. Thesecond layer 2150, as previously described, typically includes metal grid embedded in a dielectric layer, such as tungsten grid embedded in a layer of SiO2. This layer of SiO2 may serve as an ARC layer if the light was entering thesilicon layer 2152 directly from air. However, due to the addition of themicrolens 2142, thespacer layer 2146 and thefirst layer 2148 which all have refractive indices that are significantly higher than that of air (approximately 1.0), the SiO2 layer may not function effectively in reducing the optical reflection at the interfaces between thesilicon layer 2152 and the stacking of thefirst layer 2148 andspacer layer 2146. - Table 1 shows simulation parameters and calculated transmission of an implementation of
configuration 2140. The layers and the thicknesses have been adapted and/or approximated for the purpose of performing a simulation that approximate the expected transmission of different implementations of theconfiguration 2140. -
TABLE 1 REFRACTIVE THICKNESS (μm) LAYERS INDEX Case 1 Case 2ARC layer 21441.46 0.161 Spacer layer 21461.56 2 First layer 21481.54 8 Second SiO2 1.46 0.55 layer Si3N4 1.95 0 0.120 2150 Silicon layer 21523.599 + 0.00135 i 1 Transmission (%) 79 98 - Referring to Table 1,
case 1 corresponds to asecond layer 2150 that includes a standard single layer of SiO2, which results in a simulated transmission of approximately 79%. For applications where it is important to detect as much of the incident light as possible, such 21% loss of the incident light may not be acceptable. Such a drop in transmission can be mitigated by including a Si3N4 layer in thesecond layer 2150 under the SiO2 layer as an intermediate layer between the SiO2 layer and thesilicon layer 2152. By including approximately 120 nm of Si3N4, the transmission can be improved to approximately 98%. As such, the intermediate layer may be referred to as an anti-reflection layer. In general, various optically transparent material with a refractive index greater than SiO2 may be used in place of Si3N4. Example materials include SiON, SiN, Al2O3, HfO2, ZrO2, and La2O3, and high-k materials (e.g., materials with high dielectric constant) that are compatible with CMOS manufacturing processes. Suitable material may have a refractive index greater than, for example, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, or 2.0. Thickness of the material should be adapted to be an odd multiple of a quarter of the wavelength of light within the material. - The addition of Si3N4 or high-k material layer directly on top of the
silicon layer 2152 may result in an increase of a dark current of thephotodetector 2154 due to, for example, increased surface defect at the Silicon-Si3N4 or the Silicon-high-k material interface relative to Silicon-SiO2 interface. To mitigate such increase in dark current, in some implementations, a second layer of SiO2 can be inserted between the Si3N4 layer and thesilicon layer 2152. Inserting the second layer of SiO2 of thickness ranging from 10 nm to 50 nm results in a transmission ranging from approximately 97.1% to 85%, respectively. As such, inserting a thin layer of SiO2, such as 10 nm, may be beneficial for mitigating the increase in dark current while maintaining high optical transmission. -
FIG. 22A shows anexample imaging system 2200 for determining characteristics of atarget object 2210. Thetarget object 2210 may be a three-dimensional object. Theimaging system 2200 may include atransmitter unit 2202, a receiver unit 2204, and aprocessing unit 2206. In general, thetransmitter unit 2202 emits light 2212 towards thetarget object 2210. Thetransmitter unit 2202 may include one or more light sources, control circuitry, and/or optical elements. For example, thetransmitter unit 2202 may include one or more NIR or visible LEDs, where the emitted light 2212 may be collimated by a collimating lens to propagate in free space. - In general, the receiver unit 2204 receives the reflected light 2214 that is reflected from the
target object 2210. The receiver unit 2204 may include one or more photodiodes, control circuitry, and/or optical elements. For example, the receiver unit 2204 may include an image sensor, where the image sensor includes multiple pixels fabricated on a semiconductor substrate. Each pixel may include one or more multi-gate photodiodes for detecting the reflected light 2214, where the reflected light 2214 may be focused to the photodiodes. Each photodiode may be the multi-gate photodiode disclosed in this patent application. - In general, the
processing unit 2206 processes the photo-carriers generated by the receiver unit 2204 and determines characteristics of thetarget object 2210. Theprocessing unit 2206 may include control circuitry, one or more processors, and/or computer storage medium that may store instructions for determining the characteristics of thetarget object 2210. For example, theprocessing unit 2206 may include readout circuits and processors that can process information associated with the collected photo-carriers to determine the characteristics of thetarget object 2210. In some implementations, the characteristics of thetarget object 2210 may be depth information of thetarget object 2210. In some implementations, the characteristics of thetarget object 2210 may be material compositions of thetarget object 2210. -
FIG. 22B shows one example technique for determining characteristics of thetarget object 2210. Thetransmitter unit 2202 may emitlight pulses 2212 modulated at a frequency fm with a duty cycle of 50% as an example. The receiver unit 2204 may receive reflectedlight pulses 2214 having a phase shift of Φ. The multi-gate photodiodes are controlled such that areadout circuit 1 reads the collected charges Q1 in a phase synchronized with the emitted light pulses, and areadout circuit 2 reads the collected charges Q2 in an opposite phase with the emitted light pulses. In some implementations, the distance, D, between theimaging system 2200 and thetarget object 2210 may be derived using the equation -
- where c is the speed of light.
-
FIG. 22C shows another example technique for determining characteristics of thetarget object 2210. Thetransmitter unit 2202 may emitlight pulses 2212 modulated at a frequency fm with a duty cycle of less than 50%. By reducing the duty cycle of the optical pulses by a factor of N, but increasing the intensity of the optical pulses by a factor of N at the same time, the signal-to-noise ratio of the received reflectedlight pulses 2214 may be improved while maintaining substantially the same power consumption for theimaging system 2200. This is made possible when the device bandwidth is increased so that the duty cycle of the optical pulses can be decreased without distorting the pulse shape. The receiver unit 2204 may receive reflectedlight pulses 2214 having a phase shift of Φ. The multi-gate photodiodes are controlled such that areadout circuit 1 reads the collected charges Q1′ in a phase synchronized with the emitted light pulses, and areadout circuit 2 reads the collected charges Q2′ in a delayed phase with the emitted light pulses. In some implementations, the distance, D, between theimaging system 2200 and thetarget object 2210 may be derived using the equation -
-
FIG. 23 shows an example of a flow diagram 2300 for determining characteristics of an object using an imaging system. Theprocess 2300 may be performed by a system such as theimaging system 2200. - The system receives reflected light (2302). For example, the
transmitter unit 2202 may emitNIR light pulses 2212 towards thetarget object 2210. The receiver unit 2204 may receive the reflectedNIR light pulses 2214 that is reflected from thetarget object 2210. - The system determines phase information (2304). For example, the receiver unit 2204 may include an image sensor, where the image sensor includes multiple pixels fabricated on a semiconductor substrate. Each pixel may include one or more photodiodes for detecting the reflected
light pulses 2214. The type of photodiodes may be the multi-gate photodiodes disclosed in this patent application, where the phase information may be determined using techniques described in reference toFIG. 22B orFIG. 22C . - The system determines object characteristics (2306). For example, the
processing unit 2206 may determine depth information of theobject 2210 based on the phase information using techniques described in reference toFIG. 22B orFIG. 22C . - An important performance metric of a photodiode is its dark current, which is a current that flows in absence of an optical signal and ambience light. In general, signal to noise ratio (SNR) of optical measurements made through photodiodes, such as TOF measurements made through multi-gate photodiodes, are negatively influenced by the presence of the dark current. For example, the SNR of an optical measurement through a photodiode is proportional to an integration time of the measurement (e.g., proportional to a square root of the integration time). The dark current of a photodiode is typically an exponential function of the reverse bias voltage established across the cathode and anode of the photodiode. As such, reducing the reverse bias voltage in a controlled manner while retaining the overall operation of the photodiode, such as the integration time of the measurement, may lead to improved SNR performance of the photodiode.
-
FIG. 24A shows a schematic diagram of acircuit 2400 for operating a multi-gate photodiode. Thecircuit 2400 includes afirst readout circuit 2410, asecond readout circuit 2430, afirst MOSFET transistor 2412, asecond MOSFET transistor 2432, acurrent steering circuit 2450, and aphotodiode 2480. Thefirst MOSFET transistor 2412 is coupled to thefirst readout circuit 2410 and thecurrent steering circuit 2450. Thesecond MOSFET transistor 2432 is coupled to thesecond readout circuit 2430 and thecurrent steering circuit 2450. - The
first readout circuit 2410 includes a firstreset MOSFET transistor 2420, afirst capacitor 2422 coupled to the firstreset MOSFET transistor 2420, and a firstsource follower circuit 2460. An input terminal of the first source follower circuit is coupled to thefirst capacitor 2422. Thesecond readout circuit 2430 includes a secondreset MOSFET transistor 2440, asecond capacitor 2442 coupled to the secondreset MOSFET transistor 2440, and a secondsource follower circuit 2470. An input terminal of the second source follower circuit is coupled to thesecond capacitor 2442. The first and secondsource follower circuits source follower circuits - The
current steering circuit 2450 includes a first currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2452 and a second currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2454. A thirdcontrol voltage source 2456 is coupled to a gate terminal of the first currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2452, and a fourthcontrol voltage source 2458 is coupled to a gate terminal of the second currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2454. Thecurrent steering circuit 2450 operates by directing the photo-generated carriers generated by thephotodiode 2480 through the firstcurrent steering MOSFET 2452, the secondcurrent steering MOSFET 2454, or a combination thereof, based on the control voltages generated by the first and secondcontrol voltage sources third voltage source 2456 to apply a third control voltage 2455 (Vc3) greater than a threshold voltage of theMOSFET 2452 while controlling thefourth voltage source 2458 to apply a fourth control voltage 2457 (Vc4) of 0 V, the photo-generated carriers generated by thephotodiode 2480 may be directed to flow through the firstcurrent steering MOSFET 2452, and vice versa. The operation of the first and second currentsteering MOSFET transistors gates - In this example, the
current steering circuit 2450 and thephotodiode 2480 in combination forms amulti-gate photodiode 2482. Themulti-gate photodiode 2482 may be analogous to themulti-gate photodiode 700 ofFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 ofFIG. 8 , or the multi-gate version of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . For example, the vertical PIN diode formed by thep+ GeSi region 731, theabsorption layer 706, and the n-well region 704 may form thephotodiode 2480. Thefirst gate 708, the first n+ Siregion 712 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the first currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2452, and thesecond gate 710, the second n+ Siregion 714 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the second currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2454. In some implementations, themulti-gate photodiode 2482 may be replaced by the switched photodetector described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/908,328 titled “HIGH-SPEED LIGHT SENSING APPARATUS II.” - Each of the
MOSFET transistors - The gate terminal controls the flow of current through the source and the drain terminals. For example, a control voltage larger than a threshold voltage Vth may allow current to flow through the source and drain terminals. Such mode of operation of the MOSFET transistors may be referred to as operating in a saturation region or a triode region of operation, depending on voltages of the source and drain terminals relative to the gate terminal. In the saturation region, the current flowing through the source and drain terminals is not strongly affected by changes in the difference between the source and drain voltages (i.e., output impedance of the transistor is high). In the triode region, the current flowing through the source and drain terminals is approximately linearly proportional to the difference between the source and drain voltages (i.e., the transistor operates similarly to a resistor). A control voltage smaller than the threshold voltage may reduce the flow of current through the source and drain terminals. For example, the flow of current may be reduced exponentially as the control voltage is reduced below the threshold voltage. Such mode of operation of the MOSFET transistors may be referred to as operating in a subthreshold region of operation.
- For the purpose of illustration, the
circuit 2400 is implemented using N-type MOSFET transistors. With respect to thefirst readout circuit 2410, the drain terminal of thefirst reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to afirst supply node 2408, and the source terminal of thefirst reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to thefirst capacitor 2422. Thefirst capacitor 2422 is coupled to the input terminal of the firstsource follower circuit 2460. The source terminal of thefirst reset MOSFET 2420 is coupled to the drain terminal of thefirst MOSFET 2412, and the source terminal of thefirst MOSFET 2412 is coupled to the drain terminal of the firstcurrent steering MOSFET 2452. As such, a flow of current into and out of thefirst capacitor 2422 may be controlled through operations of various MOSFETs coupled to thefirst capacitor 2422. Analogously, with respect to thesecond readout circuit 2430, the drain terminal of thesecond reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to thefirst supply node 2408, and the source terminal of thesecond reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to thesecond capacitor 2442. Thesecond capacitor 2442 is coupled to an input terminal of the secondsource follower circuit 2470. The source terminal of thesecond reset MOSFET 2440 is coupled to the drain terminal of thesecond MOSFET 2432, and the source terminal of thesecond MOSFET 2432 is coupled to the drain terminal of the secondcurrent steering MOSFET 2454. As such, a flow of current into and out of thesecond capacitor 2442 may be controlled through operations of various MOSFETs coupled to thesecond capacitor 2442. - The
first supply node 2408 supplies a first supply voltage to the first and the secondreset MOSFET transistors second supply node 2402 supplies a second supply voltage to the first and the secondsource follower circuits second supply nodes photodiode 2480, reset voltage of the first andsecond capacitors first supply node 2408 may be referred to as a VU node, and the first supply voltage of the VU node may be a user-defined voltage generated by, for example, an on-chip integrated circuit block. Thesecond supply node 2402 may be referred to as a VE node, and the second supply voltage of the VE node may be an externally-defined voltage generated by, for example, an off-chip power supply. - During operation of the
circuit 2400, thefirst capacitor 2422 and thesecond capacitor 2442 are charged to a preset voltage through the first and secondreset MOSFET transistors reset MOSFET transistors first supply node 2408 to therespective capacitors capacitors control voltage source 2407 coupled to the gate terminals of the first and secondreset MOSFET transistors second control voltage 2406. Thesecond control voltage 2406 may be controlled to vary the preset voltage to which thecapacitors capacitors second control voltage 2406 may be set (e.g., to 0 V) to turn off the first and secondreset MOSFET transistors capacitors first supply node 2408. This charging operation may be referred to as a reset operation of thecircuit 2400. The reset operation may be a step within the readout step of themulti-gate photodiode 2482. - Once the charging is complete, integration of the electrical signal generated by the
photodiode 2480 may begin. The first andsecond MOSFETs control voltage source 2405 coupled to the gate terminals of theMOSFETs first control voltage 2404 may be set through thecontrol voltage source 2405 to operate the first andsecond MOSFETs multi-gate photodiode 2482 may flow through the drain and source terminals of theMOSFETs current steering circuit 2450 of themulti-gate photodiodes 2482. Such flow of the photocurrent through thecurrent steering circuit 2450 may be integrated at thecapacitors capacitors - Operation of the first and
second MOSFETs second capacitors steering MOSFET transistors second MOSFETs photodiode 2480. For example, the photodiode current, which may be a combination of photocurrent and dark current, is typically a small current (e.g., ranging from pA to μA), and the resulting voltage drops across the resistors are relatively small as well (e.g., ranging from nV to mV). As such, the voltages at the drain terminals of the currentsteering MOSFET transistors capacitors capacitors first supply node 2408, and the currentsteering MOSFET transistors photodiode 2480 coupled to their source terminals when one or both of the current steering MOSFET transistors are turned on. As such, thephotodiode 2480 may experience a voltage similar to the preset voltage to which thecapacitors photodiode 2480 that may be larger than the minimum reverse bias needed for proper operation of thephotodiode 2480. Such excessive reverse bias results in increased dark current, which may reduce the SNR of the output generated by thecircuit 2400. - Photodiodes of various design and material composition may benefit from controlling of the reverse bias voltage. Among materials for forming the absorption region of a photodiode, germanium maybe more susceptible to dark current generation relative to silicon due to a higher material defect density that is typically associated with germanium absorption region grown on silicon substrate. As such, germanium-based
multi-gate photodiode 2482 may be well suited to benefit from the controlling of the reverse bias voltage through thefirst control voltage 2404 and the resulting reduction in the dark current. - The reverse bias established across the junction of the
photodiode 2480 may be reduced by decoupling the drain terminals of the currentsteering MOSFET transistors respective capacitors second MOSFETs photodiode 2480 to flow through thecurrent steering circuit 2450 and the drain and source terminals of theMOSFETs second MOSFETs second MOSFETs second MOSFETs capacitors current steering MOSFETs current steering MOSFETs capacitors current steering MOSFETs first control voltage 2404 and the threshold voltages of the first and thesecond MOSFETs first control voltage 2404 reduces the voltages at the drain terminals of thecurrent steering MOSFETs photodiode 2480. As a result, the dark current of themulti-gate photodiode 2482 may be reduced, and SNR of the output generated by thecircuit 2400 may be improved. - The first and
second MOSFETs control voltage source 2405, thefirst control voltage 2404. For example, MOSFETs can be operated in the saturation region by setting the voltage difference between the gate terminal and the source terminal (VGS) to be greater than the threshold voltage (VTH) while maintaining the voltage difference between the drain terminal and the source terminal (VDS) to be greater than VGS−VTH. As another example, MOSFETs can be operated in the subthreshold region by setting the voltage difference between the gate terminal and the source terminal (VGS) to be smaller than the threshold voltage VTH. In general, thefirst control voltage 2404 may be varied to control the voltage difference between thecapacitors current steering MOSFETs first control voltage 2404 may be increased to reduce the voltage difference, and vice versa. In some implementations, thefirst control voltage 2404 may control the voltage difference between thecapacitors current steering MOSFETs first supply node 2408. In some implementations, thefirst control voltage 2404 may control the voltages of the drain terminals of thecurrent steering MOSFETs capacitors - When the first and
second MOSFETs MOSFETs - After a preset integration time, the
first control voltage 2404 may be set (e.g., to 0 V) to turn off the first andsecond MOSFETs respective MOSFETs second MOSFETs - Once integration has been completed, the
capacitors current steering MOSFETs source follower circuits - The
current steering circuit 2450 may be operated in various ways to implement various operation modes of thecircuit 2400. Operation modes of thecircuit 2400 includes a time-of-flight (TOF) imaging mode, a first intensity imaging mode, and a second intensity imaging mode. The operation modes of thecircuit 2400 may be controlled, for example, by theprocessing unit 2206, or a control unit of theimaging system 2200. - The
circuit 2400 may be operated in the TOF imaging mode by steering the photo-generated carriers generated by thephotodiode 2480 to thefirst readout circuit 2410 for a first period, and steering the photo-generated carriers to thesecond readout circuit 2430 for a second period. The steering may be performed by controlling thethird voltage source 2456 to apply thethird control voltage 2455 greater than the threshold voltage of theMOSFET 2452 while simultaneously controlling thefourth voltage source 2458 to apply thefourth control voltage 2457 of 0 V for the first period of time, then controlling thefourth voltage source 2458 to apply thefourth control voltage 2455 greater than the threshold voltage of theMOSFET 2454 while simultaneously controlling thethird voltage source 2456 to apply thethird control voltage 2455 of 0 V for the second period of time. An example operation of the time-of-flight imaging mode has been described in relation toFIGS. 22A-22C and 23 , where charges Q1 and Q2 are stored in the first andsecond capacitors light pulses 2212. - The
circuit 2400 may be operated in the first intensity imaging mode by controlling thethird voltage source 2456 and thefourth voltage source 2458 in a synchronous manner, such that the third andfourth control voltages fourth voltage sources current steering MOSFETs capacitors photodiode 2480 has received during an integration time period, which corresponds to an intensity of light received during the integration time period. By directing the photo-generated carriers to bothcapacitors capacitors transmitter unit 2202 and a demodulation of thereceiver unit 2206 shown inFIG. 22A . - The
circuit 2400 may be operated in the second intensity imaging mode by controlling one of the third andfourth voltage sources fourth voltage sources fourth voltage source 2458 to output a fixed control voltage of 0 V, the secondcurrent steering MOSFET 2454 is shut off, and photo-generated carriers do not flow to thesecond capacitor 2442. As such, the output of thesecond readout circuit 2430 is not used, and the photo-generated carriers are integrated only at thefirst capacitor 2422 through control of thethird voltage source 2456. The voltage of thefirst capacitor 2422 may be read-out and processed to determine the amount of light thephotodiode 2480 has received during an integration time period, which corresponds to an intensity of light received during the integration time period. Integration of the photo-generated carriers at one, and not both, of the capacitors may simplify the determination of the amount of received light. Further, unused readout circuit, such as thesecond readout circuit 2430, may be shut down to save power. In some implementations, the second intensity imaging mode may not require a modulation of thetransmitter unit 2202 and a demodulation of thereceiver unit 2206 shown inFIG. 22A . - The operation of the
circuit 2400 may be controlled by thecontrol voltage sources control voltages photodiode 2480, and thecontrol voltage sources imaging system 2200, such as in the receiver unit 2204 or theprocessing unit 2206 ofFIG. 22A . To mitigate charge injection or clock feedthrough, charge injection cancelling and clock feedthrough cancelling techniques may be implemented with theMOSFETs MOSFETs control voltage 2404 may be a programmable reference voltage generated by, for example, a tunable LDO (Low Dropout) regulator, a resistor divider, or a diode-connected N-type MOSFET as thecontrol voltage source 2405. Thecontrol voltage 2404 may be set to ensure the operation of theMOSFETs - In some implementations, to operate the
circuit 2400 at a high speed, theMOSFETs MOSFETs MOSFETs - In some implementations, the
control voltage 2406 may be a reset signal configured to periodically reset voltages atnodes - While an N-type implementation of the
circuit 2400 have been described, in general, thecircuit 2400 may be implemented as a P-type circuit. For example, theMOSFETs source follower circuits photodiode 2480 may be reversed. In some implementations, theMOSFETs MOSFETs MOSFET - The
circuit 2400 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of thecircuit 2400. For example, in some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first andsecond MOSFET transistors second readout circuits steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer. As another example, in some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 and thecurrent steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first andsecond MOSFET transistors second readout circuits photodiode 2480, thecurrent steering circuit 2450, and the first andsecond MOSFET transistors second readout circuits -
FIG. 24B shows a schematic diagram of acircuit 2402 for operating a multi-gate photodiode. Thecircuit 2402 is similar to thecircuit 2400 ofFIG. 23A , but differs in that the first andsecond MOSFETs circuit 2400 have been replaced with aMOSFET 2413 arranged between thephotodiode 2480 and thecurrent steering circuit 2450. TheMOSFET 2413 may be similar to the first andsecond MOSFETs FIG. 24A , and may perform an analogous function. For example, theMOSFET 2413 may operate as a current buffer that decouples the source voltage from the drain voltage. As such, the reverse bias applied to thephotodiode 2480 may be reduced through theMOSFET 2413. Thephotodiode 2480, thecurrent steering circuit 2450, and theMOSFET 2413 form amulti-gate photodiode 2484. In some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 and theMOSFET 2413 of themulti-gate photodiode 2484 may be analogous to thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . - The
circuit 2402 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of thecircuit 2402. For example, in some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and theMOSFET transistor 2413, the first andsecond readout circuits steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the second semiconductor layer. As another example, in some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 and theMOSFET transistor 2413 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and thecurrent steering circuit 2450 and the first andsecond readout circuits photodiode 2480, theMOSFET transistors 2413, and thecurrent steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first andsecond readout circuits -
FIG. 24C shows a schematic diagram of acircuit 2404 for operating a multi-gate photodiode. Thecircuit 2404 is similar to thecircuit 2400 ofFIG. 23A , but differs in that the first andsecond MOSFETs circuit 2400 have been omitted, and the first and secondcurrent steering MOSFETs second MOSFETs current steering circuit 2450 may provide a decoupling of the voltage of thecapacitors photodiode 2480 while providing the current steering function. - An example operation of the
current steering circuit 2450 for reducing the reverse bias of thephotodiode 2480 is described. In thecircuit 2400 ofFIG. 24A , the third andfourth control voltages MOSFETs control voltage sources respective control voltages current steering MOSFETs capacitors photodiode 2480. For example, when the photo-generated carriers are to be steered through the firstcurrent steering MOSFET 2452, thethird control voltage 2455 may be set to a voltage that is less than the threshold voltage of thecurrent steering MOSFET 2452 to operate theMOSFET 2452 in the subthreshold region, and thefourth control voltage 2457 may be set to 0 V or a voltage substantially equal to 0 V to operate theMOSFET 2454 in the cut-off region. For example, when the photo-generated carriers are to be steered through the firstcurrent steering MOSFET 2452, thethird control voltage 2455 may be set to a voltage that is greater than the threshold voltage of thecurrent steering MOSFET 2452 while maintaining the voltage difference between the drain and the gate terminals of thecurrent steering MOSFET 2452 at a level greater than the threshold voltage of thecurrent steering MOSFET 2452 to operate theMOSFET 2452 in the saturation region, and thefourth control voltage 2457 may be set to 0 V or a voltage substantially equal to 0 V to operate theMOSFET 2454 in the cut-off region. - In some implementations, the third and fourth
control voltage sources control voltages current steering MOSFETs output control voltages current steering MOSFETs - In some implementations, to operate the
circuit 2404 at a high speed, thecontrol voltage sources MOSFETs corresponding control voltages control voltage sources - In this example, the
current steering circuit 2450 and thephotodiode 2480 in combination forms amulti-gate photodiode 2482. Themulti-gate photodiode 2482 may be analogous to themulti-gate photodiode 700 ofFIG. 7 , themulti-gate photodiode 800 ofFIG. 8 , the multi-gate version of thephotodiodes FIGS. 10B-10D and 11A-11H . For example, the vertical PIN diode formed by thep+ GeSi region 731, theabsorption layer 706, and the n-well region 704 may form thephotodiode 2480. Thefirst gate 708, the first n+ Siregion 712 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the first currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2452, and thesecond gate 710, the second n+ Siregion 714 and a portion of the n-well region 704 may form the second currentsteering MOSFET transistor 2454. In some implementation, themulti-gate photodiode 2482 may be replaced by the switched photodetector described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/908,328 titled “HIGH-SPEED LIGHT SENSING APPARATUS II.” - The
circuit 2404 may be fabricated through wafer bonding a first semiconductor layer and a second semiconductor layer having various components of thecircuit 2404. For example, in some implementations, thephotodiode 2480 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the current-steering circuit 2450 and the first andsecond readout circuits photodiode 2480 and thecurrent steering circuit 2450 may be fabricated on the first semiconductor layer, and the first andsecond readout circuits - While the term “photodiode” is used in various contexts such as in “photodiode” 2480, multi-gate “photodiode” 2482, and multi-gate “photodiode” 2484, and typically refers to a two-terminal device, it should be understood that, in general, any photon-to-carrier conversion device with two or more terminals that generates photocurrent may be used in place of the photodiode, such as the “photodiode” 2480, the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482, or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484. For example, a phototransistor is a three-terminal device in which the photo-generated carriers are amplified by an internal gain (e.g., electron devices N+PN, N+NN+, N+PIN, and N+PINN+; hole devices P+NP, P+NPP+, P+NIP, and P+NIPP+). The phototransistor may be used in place of the “photodiode” 2480, the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482, or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484. As another example, a floating-base phototransistor in a two-terminal configuration may also be used in place of the “photodiode” 2480, the multi-gate “photodiode” 2482, or the multi-gate “photodiode” 2484.
- A number of implementations have been described. Nevertheless, it will be understood that various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the disclosure. For example, various forms of the flows shown above may be used, with steps re-ordered, added, or removed.
- Various implementations may have been discussed using two-dimensional cross-sections for easy description and illustration purpose. Nevertheless, the three-dimensional variations and derivations should also be included within the scope of the disclosure as long as there are corresponding two-dimensional cross-sections in the three-dimensional structures.
- While this specification contains many specifics, these should not be construed as limitations, but rather as descriptions of features specific to particular embodiments. Certain features that are described in this specification in the context of separate embodiments may also be implemented in combination in a single embodiment. Conversely, various features that are described in the context of a single embodiment may also be implemented in multiple embodiments separately or in any suitable subcombination. Moreover, although features may be described above as acting in certain combinations and even initially claimed as such, one or more features from a claimed combination may in some cases be excised from the combination, and the claimed combination may be directed to a subcombination or variation of a subcombination.
- Similarly, while operations are depicted in the drawings in a particular order, this should not be understood as requiring that such operations be performed in the particular order shown or in sequential order, or that all illustrated operations be performed, to achieve desirable results. In certain circumstances, multitasking and parallel processing may be advantageous. Moreover, the separation of various system components in the embodiments described above should not be understood as requiring such separation in all embodiments, and it should be understood that the described program components and systems may generally be integrated together in a single software product or packaged into multiple software products.
- Thus, particular embodiments have been described. Other embodiments are within the scope of the following claims. For example, the actions recited in the claims may be performed in a different order and still achieve desirable results.
Claims (21)
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/208,478 US20210225922A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2021-03-22 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
US18/223,997 US20230369376A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-07-19 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
Applications Claiming Priority (21)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201562200652P | 2015-08-04 | 2015-08-04 | |
US201562209349P | 2015-08-25 | 2015-08-25 | |
US201562210946P | 2015-08-27 | 2015-08-27 | |
US201562210991P | 2015-08-28 | 2015-08-28 | |
US201562211004P | 2015-08-28 | 2015-08-28 | |
US201562217031P | 2015-09-11 | 2015-09-11 | |
US201562251691P | 2015-11-06 | 2015-11-06 | |
US201562271386P | 2015-12-28 | 2015-12-28 | |
US15/228,282 US9954016B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2016-08-04 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus |
US201762485003P | 2017-04-13 | 2017-04-13 | |
US201762500457P | 2017-05-02 | 2017-05-02 | |
US201762504531P | 2017-05-10 | 2017-05-10 | |
US201762542329P | 2017-08-08 | 2017-08-08 | |
US201762561266P | 2017-09-21 | 2017-09-21 | |
US201762583854P | 2017-11-09 | 2017-11-09 | |
US201862613054P | 2018-01-03 | 2018-01-03 | |
US201862643295P | 2018-03-15 | 2018-03-15 | |
US201862651085P | 2018-03-31 | 2018-03-31 | |
US15/952,088 US10707260B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2018-04-12 | Circuit for operating a multi-gate VIS/IR photodiode |
US16/752,194 US10964742B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-01-24 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus II |
US17/208,478 US20210225922A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2021-03-22 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/752,194 Continuation US10964742B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-01-24 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus II |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/223,997 Division US20230369376A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-07-19 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20210225922A1 true US20210225922A1 (en) | 2021-07-22 |
Family
ID=63105380
Family Applications (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/952,088 Active 2036-11-27 US10707260B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2018-04-12 | Circuit for operating a multi-gate VIS/IR photodiode |
US16/752,194 Active US10964742B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-01-24 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus II |
US17/208,478 Abandoned US20210225922A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2021-03-22 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
US18/223,997 Pending US20230369376A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-07-19 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/952,088 Active 2036-11-27 US10707260B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2018-04-12 | Circuit for operating a multi-gate VIS/IR photodiode |
US16/752,194 Active US10964742B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-01-24 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus II |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/223,997 Pending US20230369376A1 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-07-19 | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus ii |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (4) | US10707260B2 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20220399393A1 (en) * | 2021-06-09 | 2022-12-15 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | SiGe Photodiode for Crosstalk Reduction |
US11637142B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2023-04-25 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus III |
US11639991B2 (en) | 2019-06-19 | 2023-05-02 | Artilux, Inc. | Photo-detecting apparatus with current-reuse |
US11756969B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-09-12 | Artilux, Inc. | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus |
Families Citing this family (30)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI694604B (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2020-05-21 | 光澄科技股份有限公司 | Optical sensor |
US10761599B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-09-01 | Artilux, Inc. | Eye gesture tracking |
US10861888B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-12-08 | Artilux, Inc. | Silicon germanium imager with photodiode in trench |
US10707260B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-07-07 | Artilux, Inc. | Circuit for operating a multi-gate VIS/IR photodiode |
EP3783656B1 (en) | 2015-08-27 | 2023-08-23 | Artilux Inc. | Wide spectrum optical sensor |
US10886309B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2021-01-05 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
US10254389B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2019-04-09 | Artilux Corporation | High-speed light sensing apparatus |
US10739443B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2020-08-11 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
US10741598B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2020-08-11 | Atrilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
FR3061803B1 (en) * | 2017-01-11 | 2019-08-16 | Soitec | FRONT-SIDE TYPE IMAGE SENSOR SUBSTRATE AND METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SUCH A SUBSTRATE |
US11105928B2 (en) | 2018-02-23 | 2021-08-31 | Artilux, Inc. | Light-sensing apparatus and light-sensing method thereof |
US11482553B2 (en) | 2018-02-23 | 2022-10-25 | Artilux, Inc. | Photo-detecting apparatus with subpixels |
TWI788246B (en) | 2018-02-23 | 2022-12-21 | 美商光程研創股份有限公司 | Photo-detecting apparatus |
CN112236686B (en) | 2018-04-08 | 2022-01-07 | 奥特逻科公司 | Optical detection device |
US10854770B2 (en) | 2018-05-07 | 2020-12-01 | Artilux, Inc. | Avalanche photo-transistor |
US10969877B2 (en) | 2018-05-08 | 2021-04-06 | Artilux, Inc. | Display apparatus |
US11448830B2 (en) | 2018-12-12 | 2022-09-20 | Artilux, Inc. | Photo-detecting apparatus with multi-reset mechanism |
US10892373B2 (en) * | 2019-02-07 | 2021-01-12 | Newport Fab, Llc | Germanium photodiode with silicon cap |
EP3705907A1 (en) * | 2019-03-04 | 2020-09-09 | Infineon Technologies AG | Time of flight sensor device and time of flight sensor arrangement |
US11029205B2 (en) * | 2019-07-16 | 2021-06-08 | Intel Corporation | Integrated circuit comprising multiple channels with integrated bypass capacitors and photodiodes |
US12015384B2 (en) * | 2019-08-22 | 2024-06-18 | Artilux, Inc. | Photo-current amplification apparatus |
US12015099B2 (en) * | 2020-08-01 | 2024-06-18 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor sensor and methods thereof |
CN111965661B (en) * | 2020-08-10 | 2024-07-12 | 莫肖波 | Dual-gate structure indirect time-of-flight device, active photoelectric detection assembly and photoelectric system |
US11367745B2 (en) * | 2020-08-20 | 2022-06-21 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and methods for sensing long wavelength light |
US11509848B2 (en) * | 2021-01-11 | 2022-11-22 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Photodiode assembly |
US11600737B2 (en) * | 2021-03-16 | 2023-03-07 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Germanium-based sensor with junction-gate field effect transistor and method of fabricating thereof |
US11855237B2 (en) * | 2021-03-16 | 2023-12-26 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd | Germanium-based sensor with junction-gate field effect transistor and method of fabricating thereof |
US20220299646A1 (en) * | 2021-03-19 | 2022-09-22 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Pixel array including time-of-flight sensors |
US11940489B2 (en) | 2021-10-15 | 2024-03-26 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Semiconductor device having an optical device degradation sensor |
WO2023165869A1 (en) * | 2022-03-02 | 2023-09-07 | Ams-Osram Ag | Optical semiconductor device, optoelectronic device and method of manufacturing an optical semiconductor device |
Family Cites Families (178)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US1068599A (en) | 1912-03-29 | 1913-07-29 | William J Mckay | Pipe-cleaning apparatus. |
BE760007A (en) | 1969-12-10 | 1971-05-17 | Western Electric Co | READ DIODE OSCILLATOR |
US4341918A (en) | 1980-12-24 | 1982-07-27 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | High voltage planar multijunction solar cell |
US4607168A (en) | 1982-07-09 | 1986-08-19 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Photosensor array devices |
FR2536188B1 (en) | 1982-11-17 | 1987-10-23 | Commissariat Energie Atomique | POINT-BY-POINT DOCUMENT READING DEVICE USING A MATRIX OF PHOTODETECTOR ELEMENTS |
US4782376A (en) | 1983-09-21 | 1988-11-01 | General Electric Company | Photovoltaic device with increased open circuit voltage |
JPS6218094A (en) | 1985-07-16 | 1987-01-27 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Wiring of electrode pattern |
US4926231A (en) | 1988-08-05 | 1990-05-15 | Motorola Inc. | Integrated pin photo-detector |
JPH0548139A (en) | 1991-08-07 | 1993-02-26 | Seiko Instr Inc | Semiconductor image sensor device |
US5453611A (en) | 1993-01-01 | 1995-09-26 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Solid-state image pickup device with a plurality of photoelectric conversion elements on a common semiconductor chip |
US6064783A (en) | 1994-05-25 | 2000-05-16 | Congdon; Philip A. | Integrated laser and coupled waveguide |
US7028899B2 (en) | 1999-06-07 | 2006-04-18 | Metrologic Instruments, Inc. | Method of speckle-noise pattern reduction and apparatus therefore based on reducing the temporal-coherence of the planar laser illumination beam before it illuminates the target object by applying temporal phase modulation techniques during the transmission of the plib towards the target |
US5965875A (en) | 1998-04-24 | 1999-10-12 | Foveon, Inc. | Color separation in an active pixel cell imaging array using a triple-well structure |
JP2000133791A (en) | 1998-10-26 | 2000-05-12 | Sony Corp | Solid-state image-pickup device |
US6483130B1 (en) | 1999-03-24 | 2002-11-19 | Honeywell International Inc. | Back-illuminated heterojunction photodiode |
JP2000350123A (en) | 1999-06-04 | 2000-12-15 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Picture selection device, camera, picture selection method and recording medium |
US6512385B1 (en) | 1999-07-26 | 2003-01-28 | Paul Pfaff | Method for testing a device under test including the interference of two beams |
JP2002203983A (en) | 2000-10-27 | 2002-07-19 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Light receiving element |
US6384462B1 (en) | 2000-12-06 | 2002-05-07 | Nova Crystals, Inc. | Planar hetero-interface photodetector |
JP2003051988A (en) | 2001-08-07 | 2003-02-21 | Inst Of Physical & Chemical Res | Solid-state image pickup element |
US6608338B2 (en) | 2001-08-30 | 2003-08-19 | Micron Technology, Inc. | CMOS imager and method of formation |
JP4235787B2 (en) | 2001-10-03 | 2009-03-11 | ソニー株式会社 | Manufacturing method of solid-state imaging device |
JP2003225207A (en) | 2002-02-04 | 2003-08-12 | Minolta Co Ltd | Visual axis detector |
IES20030146A2 (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2003-09-03 | Trinity College Dublin | A semiconductor photodetector |
JP3854887B2 (en) | 2002-04-05 | 2006-12-06 | キヤノン株式会社 | Photoelectric conversion device |
JP4271917B2 (en) | 2002-09-12 | 2009-06-03 | 国立大学法人 奈良先端科学技術大学院大学 | Solid-state imaging device and imaging device using the device |
DE60322233D1 (en) | 2002-09-19 | 2008-08-28 | Quantum Semiconductor Llc | LIGHT-DETECTING DEVICE |
US7012314B2 (en) | 2002-12-18 | 2006-03-14 | Agere Systems Inc. | Semiconductor devices with reduced active region defects and unique contacting schemes |
JP2004309701A (en) | 2003-04-04 | 2004-11-04 | Olympus Corp | Range-finding/photometric sensor and camera |
EP1665382B1 (en) | 2003-09-18 | 2012-12-12 | iC-Haus GmbH | Optoelectronic sensor and device for 3d distance measurement |
JP2005123674A (en) | 2003-10-14 | 2005-05-12 | Konica Minolta Holdings Inc | Image pickup apparatus and image pickup system |
US6958194B1 (en) | 2003-10-21 | 2005-10-25 | Foveon, Inc. | Imager with improved sensitivity |
US7067394B2 (en) | 2004-02-25 | 2006-06-27 | Intel Corporation | Manufacturing of monolithically integrated pin structures |
TWI246116B (en) | 2004-04-14 | 2005-12-21 | Witty Mate Corp | Process for growing ZnSe Epitaxy layer on Si substrate and semiconductor structure thereby |
US8217381B2 (en) | 2004-06-04 | 2012-07-10 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Controlled buckling structures in semiconductor interconnects and nanomembranes for stretchable electronics |
US7157300B2 (en) | 2004-11-19 | 2007-01-02 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Fabrication of thin film germanium infrared sensor by bonding to silicon wafer |
US20110102553A1 (en) | 2007-02-28 | 2011-05-05 | Tessera Technologies Ireland Limited | Enhanced real-time face models from stereo imaging |
US7750958B1 (en) | 2005-03-28 | 2010-07-06 | Cypress Semiconductor Corporation | Pixel structure |
JPWO2006129428A1 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2008-12-25 | シャープ株式会社 | Photodiode and display device |
US7233051B2 (en) | 2005-06-28 | 2007-06-19 | Intel Corporation | Germanium/silicon avalanche photodetector with separate absorption and multiplication regions |
JP4658732B2 (en) | 2005-08-09 | 2011-03-23 | ローム株式会社 | Photodiode and phototransistor |
DE602005005685T2 (en) | 2005-10-19 | 2009-07-09 | Mesa Imaging Ag | Device and method for the demodulation of modulated electromagnetic wave fields |
US7535089B2 (en) | 2005-11-01 | 2009-05-19 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Monolithically integrated light emitting devices |
ES2605367T3 (en) | 2006-01-26 | 2017-03-14 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Eye tracking device |
US7629661B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2009-12-08 | Noble Peak Vision Corp. | Semiconductor devices with photoresponsive components and metal silicide light blocking structures |
US7470946B2 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2008-12-30 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Triple-junction filterless CMOS color imager cell |
US7419844B2 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2008-09-02 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Real-time CMOS imager having stacked photodiodes fabricated on SOI wafer |
US7826058B1 (en) | 2006-05-19 | 2010-11-02 | Bowling Green State University | All optical and hybrid reflection switch at a semiconductor/glass interface due to laser beam intersection |
KR100820639B1 (en) | 2006-07-25 | 2008-04-10 | 한국과학기술연구원 | System and method for 3-dimensional interaction based on gaze and system and method for tracking 3-dimensional gaze |
KR100779091B1 (en) | 2006-07-28 | 2007-11-27 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Optical device including gate insulator with modulated thickness |
JP4879326B2 (en) | 2006-11-20 | 2012-02-22 | トムソン ライセンシング | System and method for synthesizing a three-dimensional image |
US20080121866A1 (en) | 2006-11-27 | 2008-05-29 | Ping Yuan | Avalanche photodiode detector |
KR20080061434A (en) | 2006-12-28 | 2008-07-03 | 동부일렉트로닉스 주식회사 | Structure of image sensor made by chemical semiconductor |
JP5400280B2 (en) | 2007-06-07 | 2014-01-29 | パナソニック株式会社 | Solid-state imaging device |
WO2009005098A1 (en) | 2007-07-03 | 2009-01-08 | Hamamatsu Photonics K.K. | Back surface incident type distance measuring sensor and distance measuring device |
JP5224319B2 (en) | 2007-07-23 | 2013-07-03 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Stereoscopic imaging device, stereoscopic imaging device control method, and program |
JP5089289B2 (en) | 2007-08-22 | 2012-12-05 | 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 | Ranging sensor and ranging device |
CN101459184B (en) | 2007-12-13 | 2011-03-23 | 中芯国际集成电路制造(上海)有限公司 | System and method for sensing image on CMOS |
US20090166684A1 (en) | 2007-12-26 | 2009-07-02 | 3Dv Systems Ltd. | Photogate cmos pixel for 3d cameras having reduced intra-pixel cross talk |
US7888763B2 (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2011-02-15 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | Backside illuminated imaging sensor with improved infrared sensitivity |
US8183510B2 (en) | 2008-02-12 | 2012-05-22 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | Image sensor with buried self aligned focusing element |
US7961301B2 (en) | 2008-05-09 | 2011-06-14 | Ball Aerospace & Technologies Corp. | Flash LADAR system |
US8253211B2 (en) | 2008-09-24 | 2012-08-28 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Semiconductor sensor structures with reduced dislocation defect densities |
US7972885B1 (en) | 2008-09-25 | 2011-07-05 | Banpil Photonics, Inc. | Broadband imaging device and manufacturing thereof |
US7910954B2 (en) | 2008-10-28 | 2011-03-22 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Image sensor element and image sensor |
JP5347520B2 (en) | 2009-01-20 | 2013-11-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Method for manufacturing solid-state imaging device |
JP5366045B2 (en) | 2009-02-27 | 2013-12-11 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Image input device, image input / output device, and electronic apparatus |
JP5401203B2 (en) | 2009-08-07 | 2014-01-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Semiconductor light receiving device and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2011066097A (en) | 2009-09-16 | 2011-03-31 | Nec Corp | Rear incidence type photo-detector and method for manufacturing the same |
GB2474631A (en) | 2009-10-14 | 2011-04-27 | Optrima Nv | Photonic Mixer |
US20120241769A1 (en) | 2009-11-27 | 2012-09-27 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Photodiode and manufacturing method for same, substrate for display panel, and display device |
KR101709941B1 (en) | 2009-12-02 | 2017-02-27 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Image sensor, image processing apparatus having the same, and method for manufacturing the image sensor |
JP2011128024A (en) | 2009-12-17 | 2011-06-30 | Sharp Corp | Three-dimensional imaging device |
EP3514831B1 (en) | 2009-12-26 | 2021-10-13 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Solid-state image pickup apparatus and image pickup system |
WO2011097306A1 (en) | 2010-02-04 | 2011-08-11 | Sony Corporation | 2d to 3d image conversion based on image content |
CN102667687B (en) | 2010-02-26 | 2015-01-21 | 夏普株式会社 | Display device having optical sensors |
US20130278631A1 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2013-10-24 | Osterhout Group, Inc. | 3d positioning of augmented reality information |
CA2786760C (en) | 2010-06-01 | 2018-01-02 | Boly Media Communications (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd. | Multi-spectrum photosensitive device |
EP2395369A1 (en) | 2010-06-09 | 2011-12-14 | Thomson Licensing | Time-of-flight imager. |
JP2012079979A (en) | 2010-10-04 | 2012-04-19 | Sony Corp | Solid-state imaging device, method for manufacturing the same, and electronic apparatus |
JP5745866B2 (en) | 2011-01-14 | 2015-07-08 | 東芝情報システム株式会社 | Solid-state image sensor |
US9285874B2 (en) | 2011-02-09 | 2016-03-15 | Apple Inc. | Gaze detection in a 3D mapping environment |
KR102586396B1 (en) | 2011-03-10 | 2023-10-10 | 사이오닉스, 엘엘씨 | Three dimensional sensors, systems, and associated methods |
JP5635937B2 (en) | 2011-03-31 | 2014-12-03 | 本田技研工業株式会社 | Solid-state imaging device |
US9236520B2 (en) | 2011-06-10 | 2016-01-12 | ActLight S.A. | Proximity sensor systems and methods of operating same |
US9070611B2 (en) | 2011-07-29 | 2015-06-30 | Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc | Image sensor with controllable vertically integrated photodetectors |
US9897805B2 (en) | 2013-06-07 | 2018-02-20 | Sony Interactive Entertainment Inc. | Image rendering responsive to user actions in head mounted display |
JP2013070030A (en) | 2011-09-06 | 2013-04-18 | Sony Corp | Imaging device, electronic apparatus, and information processor |
US8816461B2 (en) | 2011-09-13 | 2014-08-26 | The Boeing Company | Dichromatic photodiodes |
US20130075607A1 (en) | 2011-09-22 | 2013-03-28 | Manoj Bikumandla | Image sensors having stacked photodetector arrays |
US8975668B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2015-03-10 | Intevac, Inc. | Backside-thinned image sensor using Al2 O3 surface passivation |
KR20130052986A (en) | 2011-11-14 | 2013-05-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Unit pixel of three dimensional image sensor and three dimensional image sensor including the same |
JP2013110551A (en) | 2011-11-21 | 2013-06-06 | Sony Corp | Information processing device, imaging device, information processing method, and program |
US9135508B2 (en) | 2011-12-20 | 2015-09-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc. | Enhanced user eye gaze estimation |
US8824779B1 (en) | 2011-12-20 | 2014-09-02 | Christopher Charles Smyth | Apparatus and method for determining eye gaze from stereo-optic views |
US9214492B2 (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2015-12-15 | Softkinetic Sensors N.V. | Multispectral sensor |
JP2013201210A (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2013-10-03 | Toshiba Corp | Solid state imaging device |
KR101620777B1 (en) | 2012-03-26 | 2016-05-12 | 애플 인크. | Enhanced virtual touchpad and touchscreen |
EP2834722A1 (en) | 2012-04-02 | 2015-02-11 | Thomson Licensing | Method for calibration free gaze tracking using low cost camera |
US9214424B2 (en) | 2012-04-20 | 2015-12-15 | Infineon Technologies Austria Ag | Method for producing a conductor line |
JP2014011304A (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2014-01-20 | Toshiba Corp | Solid-state imaging device |
ES2898981T3 (en) | 2012-08-09 | 2022-03-09 | Tobii Ab | Quick activation in a gaze tracking system |
JP2014041867A (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2014-03-06 | Toshiba Corp | Solid-state image pickup device, and manufacturing method thereof |
US8872294B2 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2014-10-28 | Micron Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for reducing signal loss in a photo detector |
JP5873982B2 (en) | 2012-10-09 | 2016-03-01 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | 3D display device, 3D image processing device, and 3D display method |
US9659991B2 (en) | 2012-10-22 | 2017-05-23 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image capturing apparatus, manufacturing method thereof, and camera |
KR101352436B1 (en) | 2012-10-31 | 2014-01-20 | 주식회사 동부하이텍 | An image sensor |
US9348019B2 (en) | 2012-11-20 | 2016-05-24 | Visera Technologies Company Limited | Hybrid image-sensing apparatus having filters permitting incident light in infrared region to be passed to time-of-flight pixel |
US20140152558A1 (en) | 2012-11-30 | 2014-06-05 | Tom Salter | Direct hologram manipulation using imu |
CN103000650B (en) | 2012-12-10 | 2015-07-29 | 复旦大学 | Near-infrared-visibllight light adjustable image sensor and manufacture method thereof |
US8748940B1 (en) | 2012-12-17 | 2014-06-10 | Intel Corporation | Semiconductor devices with germanium-rich active layers and doped transition layers |
CN104995751B (en) | 2012-12-27 | 2017-07-14 | 首尔伟傲世有限公司 | The light detection encapsulation of light sensing device including the light sensing device and the portable equipment that encapsulation is detected including the light |
AU2014204252B2 (en) | 2013-01-03 | 2017-12-14 | Meta View, Inc. | Extramissive spatial imaging digital eye glass for virtual or augmediated vision |
US9251590B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2016-02-02 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Camera pose estimation for 3D reconstruction |
KR102007277B1 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2019-08-05 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Depth pixel included in three-dimensional image sensor and three-dimensional image sensor including the same |
US10269855B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-04-23 | ActLight SA | Photo detector systems and methods of operating same |
JP2014187554A (en) | 2013-03-22 | 2014-10-02 | Fujitsu Ltd | Imaging apparatus, information processing apparatus, mobile terminal device and display device |
US9335547B2 (en) | 2013-03-25 | 2016-05-10 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Head-mounted display device and method of controlling head-mounted display device |
US8860083B1 (en) * | 2013-05-13 | 2014-10-14 | Sensors Unlimited, Inc. | Low noise hybridized detector using charge transfer |
US9748429B1 (en) | 2013-06-11 | 2017-08-29 | National Technology & Engineering Solutions Of Sandia, Llc | Avalanche diode having reduced dark current and method for its manufacture |
US10230934B2 (en) | 2013-06-14 | 2019-03-12 | Microsoft Tehcnology Licensing, Llc | Depth map correction using lookup tables |
US9239626B1 (en) | 2013-07-02 | 2016-01-19 | Google Inc. | Input system |
CN105849583B (en) | 2013-07-05 | 2018-01-23 | 阿克特莱特股份公司 | Proximity transducer system and its operating method |
KR20150006605A (en) | 2013-07-09 | 2015-01-19 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device and method of manufacturing an organic light emitting display device |
US9582075B2 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2017-02-28 | Nvidia Corporation | Gaze-tracking eye illumination from display |
JP2015033103A (en) | 2013-08-07 | 2015-02-16 | ソニー株式会社 | Image processing device, image processing method, and program |
US9153717B2 (en) | 2013-08-09 | 2015-10-06 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd. | Backside illuminated photo-sensitive device with gradated buffer layer |
AU2014310703B2 (en) | 2013-08-19 | 2018-09-27 | Basf Se | Optical detector |
US9635351B2 (en) | 2013-11-20 | 2017-04-25 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Integrated reference pixel |
KR20150068219A (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2015-06-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Image sensor, manufacturing method of the same, and image processing system comprising the same |
US9542749B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2017-01-10 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Fast general multipath correction in time-of-flight imaging |
EP3792662A1 (en) | 2014-01-13 | 2021-03-17 | Sony Depthsensing Solutions SA/NV | Time-of-flight system for use with an illumination system |
JP6268303B2 (en) | 2014-02-04 | 2018-01-24 | フラウンホーファー−ゲゼルシャフト・ツール・フェルデルング・デル・アンゲヴァンテン・フォルシュング・アインゲトラーゲネル・フェライン | 2D image analyzer |
US9299864B2 (en) | 2014-02-21 | 2016-03-29 | Sifotonics Technologies Co., Ltd. | Ge/Si avalanche photodiode with integrated heater and fabrication thereof |
JP2015194838A (en) | 2014-03-31 | 2015-11-05 | 株式会社国際電気通信基礎技術研究所 | Line-of-sight direction estimation device and line-of-sight direction estimation method |
JP6374690B2 (en) * | 2014-04-01 | 2018-08-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Imaging apparatus, control method therefor, program, and storage medium |
CN104157658B (en) | 2014-04-09 | 2017-05-10 | 苏州东微半导体有限公司 | Semiconductor light-sensitive cell and semiconductor light-sensitive cell array thereof |
US9836165B2 (en) | 2014-05-16 | 2017-12-05 | Apple Inc. | Integrated silicon-OLED display and touch sensor panel |
US9806122B2 (en) | 2014-07-25 | 2017-10-31 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | Visible and infrared image sensor |
US20170237911A1 (en) | 2014-11-06 | 2017-08-17 | Siliconfile Technologies Inc. | Image sensor having improved spectral characteristics |
CN107210308B (en) | 2014-11-13 | 2018-06-29 | 光澄科技股份有限公司 | Light absorber device |
US9602750B2 (en) | 2014-11-25 | 2017-03-21 | Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc | Image sensor pixels having built-in variable gain feedback amplifier circuitry |
JP6652065B2 (en) | 2014-12-01 | 2020-02-19 | ソニー株式会社 | Image processing apparatus and image processing method |
GB201421512D0 (en) | 2014-12-03 | 2015-01-14 | Melexis Technologies Nv | A semiconductor pixel unit for simultaneously sensing visible light and near-infrared light, and a semiconductor sensor comprising same |
KR102328140B1 (en) | 2014-12-15 | 2021-11-18 | 에스케이하이닉스 주식회사 | Curved image sensor, method for fabricating the same and electronic device having the same |
US20160187976A1 (en) | 2014-12-29 | 2016-06-30 | Immersion Corporation | Systems and methods for generating haptic effects based on eye tracking |
US10032912B2 (en) | 2014-12-31 | 2018-07-24 | Stmicroelectronics, Inc. | Semiconductor integrated structure having an epitaxial SiGe layer extending from silicon-containing regions formed between segments of oxide regions |
US10134926B2 (en) | 2015-02-03 | 2018-11-20 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Quantum-efficiency-enhanced time-of-flight detector |
KR102272254B1 (en) | 2015-02-13 | 2021-07-06 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Image generating device for generating depth map with phase detection pixel |
US9721982B2 (en) | 2015-03-27 | 2017-08-01 | Ecole Polytechnique Federale De Lausanne (Epfl) | One transistor active pixel sensor with tunnel FET |
WO2016170442A1 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2016-10-27 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Imaging device, method for driving imaging device, and electronic device |
WO2016185079A1 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2016-11-24 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Filtering depth map image |
KR102516593B1 (en) | 2015-05-20 | 2023-04-03 | 퀀텀-에스아이 인코포레이티드 | Optical sources for fluorescence lifetime analysis |
US9472588B1 (en) | 2015-06-19 | 2016-10-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Monolithic visible-infrared focal plane array on silicon |
US20180151732A1 (en) | 2015-06-19 | 2018-05-31 | Intel Corporation | Resistance reduction in transistors having epitaxially grown source/drain regions |
JP2018136123A (en) | 2015-06-24 | 2018-08-30 | 株式会社村田製作所 | Distance sensor and user interface apparatus |
TWI694604B (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2020-05-21 | 光澄科技股份有限公司 | Optical sensor |
JP6811523B2 (en) | 2015-07-30 | 2021-01-13 | 技術研究組合光電子融合基盤技術研究所 | Optical device |
US10707260B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-07-07 | Artilux, Inc. | Circuit for operating a multi-gate VIS/IR photodiode |
CN108028258B (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2022-06-21 | 光程研创股份有限公司 | Germanium-silicon photosensitive equipment |
US10761599B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-09-01 | Artilux, Inc. | Eye gesture tracking |
US10861888B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2020-12-08 | Artilux, Inc. | Silicon germanium imager with photodiode in trench |
EP3128342A1 (en) | 2015-08-07 | 2017-02-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Photoelectric conversion device, ranging apparatus, and information processing system |
EP3783656B1 (en) | 2015-08-27 | 2023-08-23 | Artilux Inc. | Wide spectrum optical sensor |
US10503265B2 (en) | 2015-09-08 | 2019-12-10 | Microvision, Inc. | Mixed-mode depth detection |
US10048513B2 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2018-08-14 | Focure Inc. | Continuous autofocusing eyewear |
US10741598B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2020-08-11 | Atrilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
US10254389B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2019-04-09 | Artilux Corporation | High-speed light sensing apparatus |
US10418407B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2019-09-17 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus III |
US10739443B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2020-08-11 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
US10886309B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2021-01-05 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus II |
US10165213B2 (en) * | 2015-11-16 | 2018-12-25 | Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co., Ltd. | Image sensor including pixel circuits |
US9703374B1 (en) | 2015-12-16 | 2017-07-11 | Google, Inc. | In-cell gaze tracking for near-eye display |
US9924866B2 (en) | 2016-01-11 | 2018-03-27 | Heptagon Micro Optics Pte. Ltd. | Compact remote eye tracking system including depth sensing capacity |
US10229502B2 (en) | 2016-02-03 | 2019-03-12 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Temporal time-of-flight |
WO2017142712A1 (en) | 2016-02-18 | 2017-08-24 | Craig Peterson | 3d system including a marker mode |
KR20190015573A (en) | 2016-06-30 | 2019-02-13 | 노쓰 인크 | Image acquisition system, apparatus and method for auto focus adjustment based on eye tracking |
US10522578B2 (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2019-12-31 | Sony Semiconductor Solutions Corporation | Pixel-level background light subtraction |
-
2018
- 2018-04-12 US US15/952,088 patent/US10707260B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-01-24 US US16/752,194 patent/US10964742B2/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-03-22 US US17/208,478 patent/US20210225922A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2023
- 2023-07-19 US US18/223,997 patent/US20230369376A1/en active Pending
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11756969B2 (en) | 2015-08-04 | 2023-09-12 | Artilux, Inc. | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus |
US11637142B2 (en) | 2015-11-06 | 2023-04-25 | Artilux, Inc. | High-speed light sensing apparatus III |
US11639991B2 (en) | 2019-06-19 | 2023-05-02 | Artilux, Inc. | Photo-detecting apparatus with current-reuse |
US20220399393A1 (en) * | 2021-06-09 | 2022-12-15 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | SiGe Photodiode for Crosstalk Reduction |
US11876110B2 (en) * | 2021-06-09 | 2024-01-16 | Omnivision Technologies, Inc. | SiGe photodiode for crosstalk reduction |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US10707260B2 (en) | 2020-07-07 |
US20230369376A1 (en) | 2023-11-16 |
US20180233528A1 (en) | 2018-08-16 |
US20200161364A1 (en) | 2020-05-21 |
US10964742B2 (en) | 2021-03-30 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10964742B2 (en) | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus II | |
US10861888B2 (en) | Silicon germanium imager with photodiode in trench | |
EP3610510B1 (en) | Germanium-silicon light sensing apparatus | |
US11749696B2 (en) | High-speed light sensing apparatus II | |
US11637142B2 (en) | High-speed light sensing apparatus III | |
US10739443B2 (en) | High-speed light sensing apparatus II | |
CN110970451B (en) | Image sensor, integrated circuit and method of forming image sensor | |
US10741598B2 (en) | High-speed light sensing apparatus II | |
TWI740769B (en) | Optical sensor | |
EP3971980B1 (en) | High-speed light sensing apparatus | |
US8319307B1 (en) | Active pixel sensors with variable threshold reset | |
JP2007184520A (en) | Layered photodiode for high-resolution cmos image sensor achieved using sti technology | |
US20210025993A1 (en) | Tri-gate charge transfer block structure in time of flight pixel | |
KR20220072257A (en) | Image Sensing Device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: ARTILUX, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:ARTILUX CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:055683/0027 Effective date: 20190621 Owner name: ARTILUX CORPORATION, CAYMAN ISLANDS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:NA, YUN-CHUNG;CHENG, SZU-LIN;CHEN, SHU-LU;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20180416 TO 20180420;REEL/FRAME:055682/0938 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: APPLICATION DISPATCHED FROM PREEXAM, NOT YET DOCKETED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |